JP7254357B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been provided a gaming machine that enhances a player's sense of anticipation for a big win and enhances interest by performing an effect of changing images such as a pending icon. For example, Patent Literature 1 below discloses a gaming machine that executes a pending change effect that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot has increased by changing the mode of the pending symbols.

JP 2019-24710 A

However, the game machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 cannot sufficiently attract the interest of players, and further improvement of interest has been demanded.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently attracting the interest of a player and realizing further improvement in the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention provided to solve the above-mentioned problems is capable of executing determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and an effect according to the determination result of the determination means. and a performance control means, wherein the performance control means provides an initial notification in response to power supply to the game machine, a predetermined performance indicating that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a specific performance different from the predetermined performance. wherein the predetermined effect is executed at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect is executed at a specific timing after the execution of the predetermined effect during a variable effect in which predetermined symbols are variably displayed. and has timing determination means capable of determining the specific timing from among a plurality of timing candidates, wherein the specific effect is a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. Among them, there are a case where one of them is performed and a case where the specific effect is performed at both the first timing and the second timing, and even if the specific effect is performed, the special effect is performed. Power supply to the gaming machine in a state where the game may not be executed and the timing determination means has determined to execute the specific performance at the second timing but the specific performance has not yet been executed. is interrupted and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after that, the specific effect can be executed at a third timing after the second timing , and at the initial notification and the third timing It is possible to overlap with the specific effect to be executed .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to add unexpectedness and diversity to the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and improve the expectation for the provision of the privilege. As a result, the gaming machine of the present invention can sufficiently attract the player's interest and further improve the amusement of the game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently attracting the interest of a player and further improving the interest in the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows the large prize-winning opening and the 2nd starting opening which were provided in the right side game area. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the big-hit determination table of a big-hit lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting data table at the time of a jackpot game completion. It is a diagram showing an example of a special electric accessary product operation mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special winning opening opening mode determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table of the second special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance determination table of a jackpot lottery of a 1st special design display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance determination table of a jackpot lottery of a 2nd special design display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the table regarding a normal design and a starting movable piece. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various storage areas of a main RAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special design stop processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal figure normal electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an auxiliary game process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the error detection process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the error cancellation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an icon color and a jackpot expectation. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon appearance production|presentation determination process in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon appearance effect determination table. It is a figure which shows the winning flash effect determination processing in the effect control section. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flash effect determination table; It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the action determination process at the time of a fluctuation|variation start in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an action determination table at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a figure which shows the dialogue advance notice determination processing in the production|presentation control part. (a) is an example of a dialogue announcement execution determination table, (b) is an example of a dialogue display color determination table, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the timer production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a timer count determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a timer type determination table. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive event determination table for one-time timer, and FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of a suggested event determination table for two-time timer. It is a figure which shows the stock production|presentation determination process in an production|presentation control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a stock effect execution determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stock activation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the cut-in determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the error alerting|reporting start processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the error notification completion|finish determination processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon appearance effect|action redetermining process in an effect|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the background image of a mode selection screen and production mode. It is a figure which shows the update aspect of the number of reservations. It is a figure which shows an example of a motion of an icon. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of an icon appearance effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of normal display; It is a figure which shows an example of a delay display. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-display. It is a figure which shows the modification of icon appearance production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a prize-winning flash effect. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of a winning flash effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of a winning flash production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the timing when the update display of the number of reservations is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing when a color change of a pending|holding icon is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the color change of a pending|holding icon. It is a diagram showing the update timing of the pending number at the start of fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the operation|movement of the production|presentation design from a fluctuation start to a fixed stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution timings of an action at the time of start of fluctuation and an advance notice of dialogue; It is a figure which shows an example of the action at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior notice of words. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when pseudo 2 (the number of pseudo continuations is 1) is performed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when pseudo 3 (the number of pseudo continuations is 2) is performed; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a normal pseudo|simulation. It is a figure which shows an example of a pseudo|simulation after a reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of Pseudo 3; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of Pseudo 3; It is a figure which shows an example of timer production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of stock production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in display. It is a figure which shows an example of a win-lose notification production (jackpot mode). It is a figure which shows an example of a win-lose notification production (losing mode). It is a figure which shows an example of a win-lose notification production (losing mode). It is a figure which shows an example of a win-lose notification production (resurrection mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation during a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a normal display during a time saving game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the delay display in a time saving game state. It is a diagram showing an example of re-display during the time-saving gaming state. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing types of errors, detection conditions, and release conditions; It is a figure which shows the notification start conditions and notification end conditions of an error. It is a figure which shows an example of RAM clear alerting|reporting. It is a figure which shows an example of power restoration alerting|reporting. It is a figure which shows an example of abnormal prize-winning error alerting|reporting. It is a figure which shows an example of magnetic detection error alerting|reporting. It is a figure which shows an example of prize-winning frequency abnormality error notification. It is a figure which shows an example of door opening error alerting|reporting. It is a figure which shows an example of switch disconnection error alerting|reporting. It is a figure which shows an example of the full-dish error alerting|reporting. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of an error notification dedicated image; It is a figure which shows an example of an external terminal board|substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the output aspect of each signal. It is a figure which shows an example when two signals overlap and are output. It is a figure which shows an example when two signals overlap and are output. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a minor error overlaps with another effect; It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the production|presentation when the security signal and the signal regarding another production|presentation overlap. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution aspect of the production|presentation when the security signal and the signal regarding another production|presentation do not overlap (when another signal comes first). It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the production|presentation when the security signal and the signal regarding another production|presentation do not overlap (when another signal comes first). It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the production|presentation when the security signal and the signal regarding another production|presentation do not overlap (when another signal is after). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an execution mode of an icon appearance effect when power is restored;

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of game machine 1)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Also, FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the big winning opening 16 and the second starting opening 15 provided in the right game area. Also, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 60 attached to an island facility of a game arcade, and a glass frame 50 rotatably supported by the outer frame 60 (see FIG. 1). Further, the outer frame 60 is provided with a game board 2 in which a game area 6 in which game balls Q flow down is formed.

The glass frame 50 includes an audio output device 32 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 34b having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), a production button 35 for changing the production mode by pressing, and at least two directions (this In the embodiment, an operation lever 36 that can be operated in four directions is provided.

The audio output device 32 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc., and performs sound effects. Also, the decorative lighting devices 34 such as the frame lighting device 34b and the navel lamp 34c are provided at a plurality of positions so as to produce effects by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each lamp. It is

The production button 35 is provided with a production button detection switch 35a (see FIG. 4), and when the production button detection switch 35a detects the player's operation, a further production is executed in response to this operation. . Similarly, the operation lever 36 is also provided with a lever operation detection switch 36b (see FIG. 4), and is configured so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 4). 4). In this embodiment, the effect button 35 is configured to be vertically movable by the effect button drive motor 35b (see FIG. 4).

Further, the glass frame 50 is provided with an operation handle 3 for shooting game balls toward the game area 6 by being rotated, and a tray 40 for storing a plurality of game balls. , and has a downward slope so that the game ball flows down in the direction of the operating handle 3.例文帳に追加A receiving port for receiving a game ball is provided at the end of the downward slope of the receiving tray 40, and the game ball received in this receiving port is driven by the ball feed solenoid 4b (see FIG. 4). , game balls are fed one by one to a ball feeding opening (not shown) provided on the back surface of the glass frame 50 . Further, the receiving tray 40 is provided with a full tank detection switch 136 (see FIG. 4) which can detect the storage state of the game balls in the receiving tray 40 and detect that the receiving tray 40 is full. there is

Then, the game ball sent to the ball feeding opening (not shown) is moved by the launch rail (not shown) having a downward slope toward the direction of the hitting member (not shown). Guided to the edge of the downward slope. Above the end of the downward slope of the launch rail, a stopper (not shown) is provided to stop the game ball, and the game ball sent out from the ball feed opening is placed on the downward slope of the launch rail. One game ball is parked at the end.

When the player touches the operating handle 3, the touch sensor 3a (see FIG. 4) provided inside the operating handle 3 detects contact between the operating handle 3 and the player. Thereafter, when the player rotates the operating handle 3, the shooting volume 3b (see FIG. 4) directly connected to the operating handle 3 also rotates, and the shooting strength of the game ball is adjusted by the shooting volume 3b. The ejection member directly connected to the ejection solenoid 4a (see FIG. 4) rotates with the increased ejection intensity. By rotating the hitting member, the game ball Q stored at the end portion of the downward slope of the shooting rail is hit by the hitting member, and the game ball is shot to the game area 6 .

The game ball shot as described above rises from the launch rail between the rails 5a and 5b (see FIG. 1) and exceeds the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and then reaches the game area 6. Free fall inside. At this time, the game balls fall unpredictably due to a plurality of nails and pinwheels provided in the game area 6.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are various winning openings (general winning opening 12, normal symbol gate 13, first starting opening 14, second starting opening 15, big winning opening 16) and , a first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal), and a decorative frame 7 are provided so as to surround the display area of the first image display device 31a.

On the other hand, outside the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol reservation display device 23. , a second special symbol reservation display 24, a normal symbol reservation display 25, a round number display 26, and a right-handed display 27 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the left lower part of the game area 6, a game ball launched toward the left side area of the game area 6 (so-called left-handed hitting) can win a prize (enter a ball). Three general winning openings 12 are provided in which game balls fired (so-called right-handed) toward the right side cannot win, and right-handed game balls win in the lower right part of the game area 6. One general winning hole 12 is provided in which (entering a ball) is possible and left-handed game balls cannot win.

Here, each general winning hole 12 is provided with a general winning hole detection switch 12a (see FIG. 4) for detecting winning of a game ball (entering a ball). Then, when it is detected that the game balls have entered the general winning hole 12, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out from a payout device for paying out the game balls. .

As shown in FIG. 1, at the lower center of the game area 6, there is provided a first starting port 14 that constitutes a starting area in which left-handed game balls can win and right-handed game balls cannot win. It is In addition, in the right area of the game area 6, there is provided a second start port 15 that constitutes a start area in which a right-handed game ball can win (enter a ball).

As shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 15 includes a starting movable piece 15b that constitutes a normal electric accessory (starting port opening and closing device) for facilitating the winning of game balls into the second starting port 15, and It has a starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c (see FIG. 4). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the starter opening/closing solenoid 15c is actuated to slide the starter movable piece 15b forward and backward (in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 2). A closed state (closed mode) in which winning of game balls is restricted, and an open state in which the starting movable piece 15b opens the opening of the second starting port 15 to allow winning of a game ball to the second starting port 15. (open mode) and conversion control is performed.

Here, the first start port 14 is provided with a first start port detection switch 14a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the winning of the game ball (entrance), and the second start port 15 is provided with a game ball. A second starting opening detection switch 15a (see FIGS. 2 and 4) is provided for detecting the winning of a prize (ball entering). When the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15 is detected, a random value for judging a big hit is obtained for performing a "big win lottery (judgment of a big win)" to be described later.

Further, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, in addition to the above-mentioned random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a special symbol for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is generated. , The reach determination random number and special figure fluctuation random number for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol are also acquired. In addition, the random number for big hit determination, the random number for special design determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure fluctuation are called special figure determination information.

Furthermore, when the winning of game balls into the first starting port 14 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out from the payout device. Further, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out from the payout device. The number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the first start port 14 and the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the second start port 15 may be the same.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area 6, there is provided a normal symbol gate 13 that constitutes a normal area through which game balls can pass.

Here, the normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a (see FIG. 4) for detecting passage (entry) of a game ball. Then, when the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, a random value for hit determination is acquired for performing a "hit lottery (hit determination)" described later.

When the game ball passing through the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, in addition to the hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value for determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the variation time of the normal symbol. A random number for normal/universal pattern fluctuation for determination is also acquired. In addition, the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for normal pattern determination, and the random number value for normal pattern fluctuation are referred to as normal pattern determination information.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the area on the right side of the game area 6, a large winning opening 16 is provided in which a right-handed game ball can win (enter a prize) and a left-handed game ball cannot win. ing.

As shown in FIG. 2, the large winning opening 16 includes a large winning opening opening and closing door 16b that constitutes a special electric accessory (large winning opening opening and closing device) for facilitating the entry of game balls into the large winning opening 16, and , and a grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16c (see FIG. 4). The upper surface of the big winning opening opening/closing door 16b slopes down in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 2) to form a flow path for the game ball Q, and is movable in the front-back direction (see the arrow in FIG. 2). ing. A closed state (closed mode) for restricting entry of game balls to the big winning opening 16 by moving the big winning opening opening/closing door 16b in the front-rear direction by the operation of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c. It is converted and controlled to an open state (open mode) that allows the winning of game balls.

Here, the big winning hole 16 is provided with a big winning hole detection switch 16a (see FIGS. 2 and 4) for detecting winning of a game ball (entering ball). Then, when the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 16 is detected, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1, at the bottom of the game area 6, a game that did not win (enter a ball) in any of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, and the big winning opening 16 An out port 11 is provided for discharging the ball out of the game area.

Here, an out ball detection switch 11a is provided on the back surface of the game board 2 (see FIG. 4). The out-ball detection switch 11a is provided to detect all the game balls shot to the game area of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. Here, the game ball detected by the out-ball detection switch 11a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the center of the game area 6, a first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal) configured by an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is provided. ), a second image display device 31b (sub-liquid crystal) having a size and display area smaller than those of the first image display device 31a is provided on each of the left and right sides.

In the following description, the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal) may be collectively referred to simply as "image display device 31".

In addition, in the following description, the area formed by both or either of the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal) and in which effect display is performed is collectively referred to as "effect In some cases, it is described as “display area 70”.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the first image display device 31a (the main liquid crystal), may be displayed on the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal), or may be displayed on the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal) and the second image. It may be displayed on both of the display devices 31b (sub-liquid crystal).

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, what is described as being displayed on the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal) in the following description of the embodiments is not limited to this, and the second image display It may be displayed on the device 31b (sub-liquid crystal). Furthermore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, what is described as being displayed on the second image display device 31b (sub-liquid crystal) in the following description of the embodiment is not limited to this, and the first image display It may be displayed on the device 31a (main liquid crystal).

The image display device 31 displays a customer waiting effect image during standby when no game is played, or displays a game effect image according to the progress of the game. Among them, three production patterns 38 (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot in the variable production described later are variably displayed, and a combination of specific production patterns 38 (for example, 777 etc.) ) is stop-displayed, a big win is notified as a jackpot lottery result, and a loss is reported as a jackpot lottery result by stop-displaying a combination (for example, 289, etc.) other than the specific performance pattern 38. .

This production pattern 38 starts variable display in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbols executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. , stop display is performed according to the stop display of the special symbol after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time. That is, the timing of variable display of the production pattern 38 and the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the production pattern 38 and the special pattern correspond to each other (they are the same time).

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 15, different types of performance symbols 38 are displayed in a variable manner or stopped. is configured as follows. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, even when the game ball enters the first start port 14 (enters the ball), even when the game ball enters the second start port 15 (enters the ball), In the variable performance, the same kind of performance symbols 38 may be variably displayed or stopped.

In addition, on the upper right side of the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), three small effect patterns 48 for informing the lottery result of the big win in the variable effect are arranged vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment). It is variably displayed by scrolling to (see FIG. 75).

The variable display of the small effect symbol 48 is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and corresponds to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. and is stopped.
That is, the variable display of the small effect design 48 is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special design or the second special design, and the first special design or , the execution state of the variable display of the second special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player.

It should be noted that the small effect pattern 48, like the effect pattern 38, is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9". It is designed to stop for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, big win mode, etc.) showing the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same small effect patterns 48 such as "777" or a combination of small effect patterns 48 with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is that. It is an aspect other than this.

In addition, in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), among the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) has not been executed (undecided ), the first reserved icon display area 72a for icon display so that the player can easily grasp the first special symbol reserved number (U1) indicating the number of special figure determination information, and the game ball to the second start port 15 Of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning, the player grasps the second special symbol reservation number (U2) indicating the number of special figure determination information for which the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) has not been executed (undecided) A second pending icon display area 72b for displaying icons so that it is easy to display, and information indicating special figure determination information during execution of variable display (variable effect) for icon display so that the player can easily grasp The variable icon display area 73 is provided.

In the following description, the icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 72a and the second pending icon display area 72b are referred to as "suspended icon (special figure determination information for which the jackpot determination has not been executed)", and the variation The icon displayed in the icon display area 73 is referred to as "the relevant variation icon (special figure determination information for which the big hit determination has been executed and the variation display (variation effect) is being performed)".

In addition, the pending icon and the variable icon may be collectively referred to simply as an “icon” for explanation.

The decoration frame 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a wall part erected from the game board 2 so that the game ball does not pass in front of the display area of the image display device 31. It is

A plurality of decorative lighting devices 34 are provided in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. The decorative lighting device 34 includes a board lighting device 34a (not shown), a frame lighting device 34b, and a navel lamp 34c. The board illumination device 34 a has a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) and is provided on both left and right sides of the decorative frame 7 . The frame lighting device 34b is provided above the first image display device 31a. Further, the navel lamp 34c is provided below the first starting port 14. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, a decorative member 33a (directing accessory) is provided on the upper portion of the decorative frame 7. As shown in FIG.

The decorative member 33a is driven by a board driving device 33 (see FIG. 4) composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc., and is capable of moving in the vertical direction. It can be moved to the front of the device 31a (main liquid crystal).

A liquid crystal display may be provided on the decorative member 33a, and at least one of the pending icon display area and the variable icon display area may be provided on the liquid crystal display.

The first special symbol display device 20 displays the lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, and displays the first special symbol over a predetermined time. The first special symbol of the type corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed after being displayed in a variable manner, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The second special symbol display device 21 displays the lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 15, and displays the second special symbol over a predetermined time. After the variable display, the second special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The first special symbol display device 20 and/or the second special symbol display device 21 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, it may be constructed such that "7" is displayed in a stopped state when the jackpot is won, and "-" is displayed in a stopped state when the game is lost.

Here, the "jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball wins (enters) the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, a random value for judging a big hit is obtained, and the obtained random number for judging a big hit is A process (jackpot determination) for determining whether a random number value corresponds to a "jackpot".

Also, in the present embodiment, "jackpot" refers to a jackpot game ( It means that the player has acquired the right to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player.

In the "jackpot game", a round game in which the big prize opening 16 (special electric role) is opened is performed a predetermined number of times ( For example, 4 times or 10 times).

A predetermined time is set for the maximum opening time (operation time of the special electric accessory) of the big winning hole 16 in each round game, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) are placed in the big winning hole 16 during this time. ) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game" is a game in which a game ball enters (enters) the big winning hole 16 and the player can win a prize ball corresponding to the entered ball. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot games are provided, which will be described later in detail.

In addition, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game (special game), the jackpot lottery cannot be performed immediately. In such cases, the right to the jackpot lottery is reserved under certain conditions.

More specifically, the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (entrance) in the first start port 14 is stored as the first reservation to the limit of four, and the game is played in the second start port 15 The special figure determination information acquired when the ball wins (enters the ball) is stored as a second reservation, and up to four pieces are stored. The first special symbol reservation number (U1), which is the number of the first reservation, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2), which is the number of the second reservation, are the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special It is displayed on the symbol reservation display device 24 .

It should be noted that the first special symbol reservation display 23 of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment indicates the number of first reservations by the lighting pattern of the two LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 61(c), when the first reservation is "0", the two LEDs of the first special symbol reservation display 23 are turned off, and when the first reservation is one , The LED on the upper side (left side) of the first special symbol reservation display 23 lights up, and when there are two first reservations, the two LEDs of the first special symbol reservation display 23 light up. Also, when there are three first reservations, the LED on the upper side (left side) of the first special symbol reservation indicator 23 blinks and the LED on the lower side (right side) lights up, and when the number of first reservations is four. , the two LEDs of the first special symbol holding display 23 blink. Also, in the second special symbol reservation display 24, the number of reservations of the second reservation is displayed in the same manner as described above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the image display device 31 (effect display area 70) includes a first reservation number display area 74a for displaying the first reservation number (first special symbol reservation number), A second reservation number display area 74b for displaying the number of 2 reservations (the number of second special symbol reservations) is provided.

The number of first reservations is displayed as a number in the first reservation number display area 74a. For example, when the number of second reservations is "2", the number "2" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 74a. Similarly, the number of second reservations is displayed as a number in the second reservation number display area 74b.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number indicating the number of first reservations is displayed in "blue" in the first reservation number display area 74a, and the number of second reservations is displayed in the second reservation number display area 74b. is displayed in red. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol reserved number and the second special symbol reserved number are displayed in such a manner that the player can visually recognize and easily distinguish them.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the number indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the number indicating the second special symbol reservation number (U2) are the same color (for example, white, black, etc.), and the area color of the first pending number display area 74a and the area color of the second pending number display area 74b may be displayed in different colors (the number color is the same and the number different background colors, etc.).

In addition, the normal symbol display device 22 provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2 is a lottery result (judgment result) is notified by displaying normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopping and displaying normal symbols of a type corresponding to the result of the lottery, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members composed of LEDs or the like. It is

Here, "winning lottery" is a random number value obtained by acquiring a random number value for winning determination when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, and the obtained random number value for winning determination corresponds to "winning". It refers to the process of determining whether or not (hit determination).

Further, in the present embodiment, "winning" means that the player has acquired the right to execute an auxiliary game advantageous to the player in the winning lottery executed based on the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13. say. In the "auxiliary game", the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is converted and controlled to the open state over a predetermined time. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 15 (enters a ball) and the player can win a prize ball corresponding to the winning. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games are provided, which will be described later in detail.

In addition, as with the special symbols, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, such as during the variable display of the normal symbols or during the auxiliary game, if the winning lottery cannot be performed immediately, under certain conditions, The right of the winning lottery is reserved.

More specifically, the normal pattern determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 is stored as a limit of 4 pieces as the third reservation. The number of normal design reservations (G), which is the number of third reservations, is displayed on the normal design reservation display device 25 in the same manner as the first special design reservation display device 23 and the second special design reservation display device 24. be done.

A round number display 26 and a right-handed display 27 are provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2 . The round number display 26 displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game, which will be described later, is executed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs. The right-handed indicator 27, when the LED lights up, makes a notification prompting to shoot a game ball toward the right game area during a jackpot game or an auxiliary game, which will be described later.

Further, the glass frame 50 supports a glass plate 52 that covers the game area 6 in front of the game board 2 (on the player side) so as to be visible. Note that the glass plate 52 is detachably fixed to the glass frame 50 .

The glass frame 50 is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism portion 51 at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the game machine 1), and the hinge mechanism portion 51 serves as a fulcrum. The other end side (for example, the right side facing the gaming machine 1) can be rotated in a direction to release it from the outer frame 60. As shown in FIG. The glass frame 50 covers the game board 2 together with the glass plate 52 and rotates like a door with the hinge mechanism 51 as a fulcrum, thereby opening the inner part of the outer frame 60 including the game board 2 .

A lock mechanism for fixing the other end of the glass frame 50 to the outer frame 60 is provided on the other end of the glass frame 50 in the left-right direction. Fixation by the lock mechanism can be released with a dedicated key. The glass frame 50 is also provided with a door open switch 133 (see FIG. 4) for detecting whether the glass frame 50 is released from the outer frame 60 or not.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110, the performance control board 120, the payout control board 130, the power supply board 140, the external terminal board 30 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game machine 1. Also, the power supply board 140 is provided with a power plug 141 for supplying power to the gaming machine 1, a frame control board 180 and a power switch (not shown).

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1)
Next, control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation (progress) of the game, inputs various detection signals such as the first start opening detection switch 14a, and operates the first special symbol display device 20, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, and the like. It drives and controls a game.

The main control board 110 is connected to the performance control board 120 , the payout control board 130 and the power supply board 140 . Communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated only in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 Communication is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. Also, the main control board 110 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

In addition, the main control board 110 has a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and various data and tables required for game control, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It has at least a built-in one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control, and a RAM clear switch 111a.

This input port for main control includes a payout control board 130, a RAM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c, and a general controller for detecting that a game ball has entered the general prize winning opening 12. A winning opening detection switch 12a, a gate detection switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has passed through a normal pattern gate 13, a first start opening detection switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first start opening 14, A second start opening detection switch 15a for detecting that a game ball has entered the second start opening 15, a large winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting that a game ball has entered the large winning opening 16, and a game machine 1. A magnetic sensor 17 for detecting magnetism and an out-ball detection switch 11a for detecting all the game balls shot to the game area of the game board 2 are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 110 through this input port for main control.

In addition, the output port for main control operates the effect control board 120, the payout control board 130, the starting opening opening/closing solenoid 15c that opens and closes the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting opening 15, and the big winning opening opening/closing door 16b. A large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, a first special symbol display device 20 and a second special symbol display device 21 that display special symbols, a normal symbol display device 22 that displays normal symbols, and a first special that displays the reserved number of special symbols. Design reservation display 23 and second special design reservation display 24, normal design reservation display 25 for displaying the number of normal design reservations, round number display 26 for informing the number of rounds, right-hand stroke for informing to urge right-hand stroke A display 27, an external terminal board 30 for outputting an external information signal, and the like are connected. Various signals are output from this output port for main control.

The main CPU 110a reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b based on the input signals from the detection switches and timers, performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device and display, or uses the result of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly.

In the main ROM 110b, in addition to the game control program, there is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 5) used for the jackpot lottery, a special symbol determination table (see FIG. 6) for determining the special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and a jackpot completion table (see FIG. 6). A set data table at the end of the jackpot game for determining the subsequent game state (see FIG. 7), a special electric accessory operation mode determination table (see FIG. 8) for determining the opening and closing conditions of the opening and closing door of the big winning opening, and a big winning opening Open state determination table (see FIG. 9), special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of special symbols (see FIGS. 10 and 11), prior determination table for jackpot lottery (see FIGS. 12 and 13), winning lottery A hit determination table (see FIG. 14), etc., which is referred to by . It should be noted that the tables described above are merely examples of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided during the progress of the game. ing.

The main RAM 110c has a special symbol special electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol normal electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol retention number (G) storage area, a normal symbol retention storage area, a stop normal symbol data storage area, and a first special symbol retention. Number (U1) storage area, 2nd special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, 1st jackpot determination random number storage area, 2nd jackpot determination random number storage area, number of round games (R) storage area, number of times opened (K) storage area, large winning opening winning ball counter (C) storage area, second starting opening winning ball counter (D), start release counter, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, high probability game Number of times (X) storage area, number of time-saving games (J) storage area, game state buffer, stop special figure data storage area, stop normal figure data storage area, transmission data storage area for production, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter , Various timer counters such as an auxiliary game timer counter are provided. Note that the above-described storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The external terminal board 30 is a board for outputting external information signals generated in the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 to a hall computer or the like of the amusement arcade. The external terminal board 30 is wire-connected to the main control board 110, and is provided with a plurality of connectors (terminals) for connecting external information to a hall computer or the like of the amusement arcade.

The effect control board 120 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby, and an effect control unit 120m that comprehensively manages the contents of the game effect, and an image control unit that controls the display of images in the image display device 31. unit 150, a drive control unit 160 that controls driving of solenoids, motors, etc. in the board drive device 33, and lamp control that performs lighting control of LEDs, etc. in the decorative lighting device 34 (board lighting device 34a, navel lamp 34c, etc.) a portion 170;

This performance control board 120 is connected to the main control board 110 , the power supply board 140 and the frame control board 180 . Communication between the effect control board 120 and the frame control board 180 is configured so that data can be communicated bidirectionally, and the effect control board 120 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

The effect control section 120m includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, and a sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a is stored in the sub ROM 120b based on commands received from the main control board 110, or input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a, the lever operation detection switch 36b, etc. received from the frame control board 180, which will be described later. Reads out a program to perform arithmetic processing, and based on the processing, instructs the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180 to execute various effects. (send data).

For example, when the sub CPU 120a receives a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation mode of a special symbol from the main control board 110, it analyzes the contents of the received variation pattern designation command, and performs image display device 31, audio output device 32, board drive device 33, decorative lighting device 34 (board lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, navel lamp 34c), production data for causing the production button drive motor 35b to execute a predetermined production (fluctuation production pattern designation described later) command, etc.). Then, the determined effect data is transmitted to the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180, thereby performing control for executing the variable effect.

The sub-ROM 120b stores a variable performance pattern determination table and the like for determining a variable performance pattern for executing a variable performance, in addition to the performance control program. It should be noted that the tables described above are merely examples of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided during the progress of the game. ing.

The sub-RAM 120c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 120a, and has a plurality of storage areas.

The image control unit 150 is connected to the image display device 31, and performs image display control on the image display device 31 based on various data for effects transmitted from the effect control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). At this time, between the image control unit 150 and the image display device 31, a general-purpose substrate 39 having a bridge function for converting image data into a predetermined image format and outputting the image data is provided.

This general-purpose substrate 39 has a bridge function for converting image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the image display device 31 for displaying image data. is connected as the image display device 31 and when a 17-inch XGA (1024 dots×768 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected as the image display device 31, the difference in resolution is absorbed.

The image control unit 150 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 150 a , a liquid crystal control RAM 150 b , a liquid crystal control ROM 150 c , a drawing control unit 151 (VDP: abbreviation of Video Display Processor), a CGROM 152 , a VRAM 153 and a crystal oscillator 154 .

The liquid crystal control CPU 150a creates a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands based on the data for effects (variation effect pattern designation commands, etc.) transmitted from the effect control unit 120m, and sends this display list to the drawing control unit 151. to instruct the image display device 31 to display the image data stored in the CGROM 152 .

Further, upon receiving a V-blank interrupt signal or a drawing end signal from the drawing control unit 151, the liquid crystal control CPU 150a appropriately performs interrupt processing.

The liquid crystal control RAM 150b is incorporated in the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, and temporarily stores data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 150c.

The liquid crystal control ROM 150c is composed of a mask ROM and the like, and includes a control processing program for the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and an animation of effects using images corresponding to data for effects. An animation pattern, animation scene information, and the like for displaying are stored.

The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation, and stores the combination of animation scene information of images corresponding to the rendering data, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image. It stores information such as information specifying a display device.

The CGROM 152 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels x 32 pixels). are doing. This pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 152 is read in units of image data by the drawing control unit 151, and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 152 stores uncompressed palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other. It should be noted that the CGROM 152 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The crystal oscillator 154 outputs a pulse signal to the drawing control unit 151 and divides the pulse signal to generate a system clock for the drawing control unit 151 to control and a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 31 . A signal or the like is generated.

The VRAM 153 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. The VRAM 153 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a frame buffer area corresponding to the image display device 31, and the like.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

The drawing control unit 151 is a so-called image processor, and draws the image data stored in the CGROM 152 in the "drawing frame buffer" of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 153 based on the instruction (display list) from the liquid crystal control CPU 150a. Furthermore, the drawing control unit 151 reads image data from the “frame buffer for display” in the frame buffer area. Based on the read image data, a video signal (LVDS signal, RGB signal, etc.) is generated and output to the image display device 31 for display.

The drive control unit 160 is connected to the board driving device 33, and drives the solenoids, motors, etc. in the board driving device 33 based on various performance data transmitted from the performance control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). control. By driving and controlling the driving device 33 for the board, the decoration member 33a provided on the game board 2 is driven.

The lamp control unit 170 is connected to the decorative lighting device 34, and performs lighting control of LEDs and the like in the decorative lighting device 34 based on various data for effects transmitted from the production control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). By controlling lighting of the decorative lighting device 34, the board lighting device 34a and navel lamp 34c provided on the game board 2 are turned on/off in a predetermined manner (predetermined emission color, etc.).

The frame control board 180 controls effects of the sound output device 32 provided on the glass frame 50, the frame illumination device 34b, and the effect button 35.

This frame control board 180 is connected to the effect control board 120 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the frame control board 180 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated bidirectionally. The frame control board 180 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

The frame control board 180 performs control to output predetermined audio data to the audio output device 32 based on various data for effects transmitted from the effect control board 120, and lights LEDs, etc. in the lighting device 34b for the frame. Control is performed, and drive control of the effect button drive motor 35b is performed. Under the control of the frame control board 180, the sound output device 32 provided on the glass frame 50 outputs sound, the lighting device 34b for the frame is turned on and off, and the effect button 35 moves up and down. .

Furthermore, the frame control board 180 transmits the input signal to the production control board 120, when the input signal from the production|presentation button detection switch 35a and the lever operation detection switch 36b is input. That is, the effect control board 120 receives input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the lever operation detection switch 36b through the frame control board 180. FIG.

The payout control board 130 includes a payout control unit 131 for controlling the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 132 for controlling the launch of game balls.

This payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the payout control board 130 and the main control board 110 is configured so that data can be communicated bidirectionally. The payout control board 130 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

The payout control unit 131 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU 131a, a payout ROM 131b, and a payout RAM 131c.

A door opening switch 133 , a payout ball counting detection switch 135 , and a plate full detection switch 136 are connected to the input side of the payout control section 131 .

The payout CPU 131a reads the program stored in the payout ROM 131b based on input signals from the payout ball counting detection switch 135 for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out, the door opening switch 133, and the timer, and performs arithmetic processing. Along with performing the processing, corresponding payout data is transmitted to the main control board 110 based on the processing.

The output side of the payout control board 130 is connected with a payout motor 134 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from the game ball storage section. The payout CPU 131a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 131b based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 134 of the payout device to produce a predetermined game ball. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 131c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 131a.

The shooting control unit 132 has the input side connected to the touch sensor 3a and the shooting volume 3b, and the output side connected to the shooting solenoid 4a and the ball feeding solenoid 4b. The firing control unit 132 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 3a and controls energization of the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feeding solenoid 4b based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 3b.

The touch sensor 3a is provided inside the operating handle 3, and is composed of a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in electrostatic capacity when the player touches the operating handle 3. FIG. When the touch sensor 3a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 3, it outputs a touch signal to the shooting control section 132 to permit the energization of the shooting solenoid 4a. The shooting control unit 132 is configured so as not to shoot the game ball Q to the game area 6 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor 3a as a major premise.

The firing volume 3b is directly connected to the rotating portion of the operating handle 3, and is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 3b divides the constant voltage (for example, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 3b by a variable resistor and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control section 132 (the voltage supplied to the firing control section 132 is variable). The firing control unit 132 energizes the firing solenoid 4a on the basis of the voltage divided by the firing volume 3b, and rotates a firing member (not shown) directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a. A ball Q is launched into the game area 6. - 特許庁

The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a hitting member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a. Rotation of the firing solenoid 4a rotates the firing member.

Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control section 132. FIG. As a result, the number of shooting games per minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute) because one shot is shot each time the shooting solenoid makes one rotation. That is, one game ball is shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a linear solenoid, and feeds the game balls in the receiving tray 40 one by one toward the hitting member directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a.

The power supply board 140 has a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the game machine 1, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, A power failure detection signal is output to the main control board 110 . More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low-probability gaming state" and a "high-probability gaming state" as a state related to the jackpot lottery, and a "non-time-saving gaming state" as a state related to the start movable piece 15b of the second start port 15. It has a "time saving game state". The state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state) related to the jackpot lottery and the state (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) related to the starting movable piece 15b can be associated with each other, and can be made independent. can. in short,
(1) "Low probability time-saving gaming state" which is a low-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state;
(2) "Low probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state;
(3) "High probability time-saving gaming state" which is a high probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state;
(4) It is possible to provide a "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low probability non-time-saving game state", and this game state is set to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. I will call it.

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" means that in the jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, the winning probability of the jackpot is For example, it refers to a game state set as low as 1/300. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the probability of winning the jackpot is set as high as 1/60, for example. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". The change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "time-saving game It is a game state that is set longer than the "state" and tends to set the opening time of the second starting port 15 short when winning is won. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal design gate 13, a winning lottery is performed, and the normal design is variably displayed in the normal design display device 22, but the normal design is 30 seconds, for example, after the variability display is started. Stop display later. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 15 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbols.

On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non-time-saving game State" and the opening time of the second starting port 15 when winning is, for example, 3 seconds, which is set longer than the "non-time-saving game state". Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as low as 1/16, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as high as 15/16. set. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the second starting port 15 is more likely to be controlled to the open state than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of game balls.

Thus, in the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to play a game (at a high base) while suppressing the consumption of game balls compared to the non-time-saving gaming state. In the following description, the non-time-saving gaming state may be described as "low base state", and the time-saving gaming state may be described as "high base state".

In addition, the non-time gaming state may be simply described as "non-electrical support", and the time-saving gaming state may be simply described as "electrical support".

In addition, in the embodiment, compared to the "non-time-saving gaming state", the "time-saving gaming state" is such that the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the opening time of the second start port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery are advantageous. have set. However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the variation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery is advantageous.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14. FIG.

(jackpot determination table for jackpot lottery)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a big hit determination table. Specifically, FIG. 5(a) is a jackpot lottery jackpot determination table triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 14, and FIG. It is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball. The jackpot probabilities are the same in the tables of FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b).

As shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), in the jackpot determination table, probability game states, jackpot determination random numbers, and jackpot determination results are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), and based on the current probability gaming state and the obtained random number value for jackpot determination, determines whether a "jackpot" has occurred. or "losing".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5(a), two random numbers for jackpot determination, "7" and "8", are determined to be jackpots in the low-probability gaming state. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, ten random numbers for judging a big win from "7" to "16" are judged as a big win. If it is a random number value other than the above, it is determined as "losing".

Therefore, since the random number range of the random number for judging a big win is from 0 to 599, the probability of being judged as a big win in the low-probability game state is 1/300, and it is judged as a big win in the high-probability game state. The probability is 1/60, which is five times higher.

(Special design decision table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed as a result of variable display. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) is a special symbol determination table for losing, and FIG. 6(b) is a special symbol determination table for big hits.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the special symbol determination table for losing, the type of the special symbol display device, and when the game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, it is acquired. A random number value for determining a special symbol and a losing special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other. In addition, a plurality of losing special symbols may be associated with the special symbol determination random number so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of losing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the special symbol determination table for the big hit includes the type of the special symbol display device (the type of the starting port where the game ball has won), the first starting port 14, or the second starting A special symbol determination random number obtained when a game ball enters the mouth 15 is associated with a jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data).

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6, and determines the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of the special symbol display device, the random number value for special symbol determination, and the like.

Then, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, based on the determined special symbol type (stop special symbol data), the performance symbol designation command as the special symbol information is determined. Here, one command of the performance pattern designation command is composed of 2-byte data, 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and 1-byte DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. data. This also applies to a variation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the game state after the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 7) and the jackpot game type (see FIG. 8) are determined by the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data). , It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the game state after the end of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game. Therefore, in the column of special symbols in FIG. 6(b), explanations corresponding to the types of jackpot games are additionally described.

(Setting data table at the end of jackpot game)
FIG. 7 is a setting data table at the end of the jackpot game for determining the game state after the jackpot game is finished.

As shown in FIG. 7, the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game includes stop special pattern data of special symbols, a game state buffer, a game state after the jackpot ends, the number of time-saving games (J), and the number of high-probability games. (X) are associated.

Here, the "game state buffer" is information indicating the game state when the jackpot is won. The game state is composed of a combination of a time-saving game state (or a non-time-saving game state) and a high-probability game state (or a low-probability game state).

Specifically, if the game state buffer is "00H", it indicates the game state information of the low-probability game state and non-time-saving game state in which both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are not set. If the game state buffer is "01H", the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set, indicating the game state information of the high probability game state and non-time saving game state. If the game state buffer is "02H", it indicates the game state information of the low probability game state and the time reduction game state in which the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set. If the game state buffer is "03H", it indicates the game state information of the high probability game state and the time reduction game state in which both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set.

The main CPU 110a refers to the setting data table at the end of the big win game shown in FIG. 7, and based on the stop special figure data of the special symbols and the game state buffer, the game state after the big win and the number of time-saving games (J). and the number of high-probability games (X) are determined.

As a feature of the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7 in this embodiment, after all the jackpot games are finished, the time saving game state (high probability time saving game state or low probability time saving game state) is determined. It is

In addition, although 10000 times may be set as the number of time-saving games (J) or the number of high-probability games (X), when the probability of a big hit is taken into account, the number of times of the jackpot game will be increased before the 10000 times fluctuation display is executed. Since there is almost no chance that the game will not be executed, 10000 times can be rephrased as substantially until the next big winning game.

In this embodiment, when the stop special figure data of the special symbol is "stop special figure data 01 (special symbol 1)", regardless of the game state before the big win game is executed, after the big win is finished, there is a high probability It will shift to the time saving game state.
In addition, when the stop special figure data of the special symbol is "stop special figure data 02 (special symbol 2)", regardless of the game state before the big win game is executed, after the big win is finished, the high probability time-saving game state will move to
In addition, when the stop special figure data of the special symbol is "stop special figure data 03 (special symbol 3)", regardless of the game state before the big win game is executed, after the big win is finished, the low probability time-saving game state will move to
In addition, when the stop special figure data of the special symbol is "stop special figure data 04 (special symbol 4)", regardless of the game state before the big win game is executed, after the big win is finished, the high probability time-saving game state will move to
In addition, when the stop special figure data of the special symbol is "stop special figure data 05 (special symbol 5)", regardless of the game state before the big win game is executed, after the big win is finished, the low probability time-saving game state will move to

(Special electric accessory operation mode determination table)
FIG. 8 is a special electric accessary product operating mode determination table for determining the big winning hole opening mode table. As will be described later, since the big winning game is executed based on this big winning opening opening mode table, it can be said that the big winning opening opening mode table indicates the type of the big winning game. In this embodiment, the term “table” may be omitted as appropriate and described as “TBL”.

As shown in FIG. 8, the special electric accessary product operating mode determination table is associated with the stop special figure data of the special symbols and the big winning opening mode table.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the big winning opening opening mode table based on the stop special figure data of the special symbol.

(Grand prize opening mode table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the structure of the big winning opening opening mode table determined in FIG. 8, and the opening and closing conditions of the big winning mouth opening/closing door 16b are determined by the big winning mouth opening mode table.

Specifically, it is a group of big winning opening mode determination tables for big winning that are referred to during a big winning game, including a first big winning table, a second big winning table, a third big winning table, a fourth big winning table, and a fifth big winning table. It consists of a jackpot table.

The large winning opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 9 includes the maximum number of round games played in one big winning game, a specified number indicating the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening in one round, and the first number from the start of the big winning game. The opening time until the round game is executed, the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening in each round game, the opening time of the big winning opening in each round game, and the opening time of the big winning opening in each round game , the interval time until the next round game is executed, and the ending time from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a executes a first jackpot game based on a first jackpot table, a second jackpot game based on a second jackpot table, a third jackpot game based on a third jackpot table, and a third jackpot game based on a third jackpot table. A fourth jackpot game is executed based on the four jackpot table, and a fifth jackpot game is executed based on the fifth jackpot table.

According to the first jackpot table and the fourth jackpot table shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot opening/closing door 16b is operated to open the jackpot 16 on the right side of the game area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. The round game to be opened can be executed for 10 rounds (10 times). However, if the prescribed number (9) of game balls enter the big winning hole 16 before the opening time elapses for 29 seconds, one round of the game ends. Then, when the 10-round game ends, the jackpot game ends.

According to the second jackpot table, the third jackpot table, and the fifth jackpot table shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot opening/closing door 16b is operated to open the jackpot 16 on the right side of the game area 6 for one round. A round game that opens up to 29 seconds per round can be executed for 4 rounds (4 times). However, if the prescribed number (9) of game balls enter the big winning hole 16 before the opening time elapses for 29 seconds, one round of the game ends. Then, when the 4-round game ends, the jackpot game ends.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
10 and 11 are diagrams showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of special symbols as described later. In addition, FIG. 10 shows a special figure variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol display device, and FIG. 11 shows a special figure variation pattern determination table of the second special symbol display device.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the special pattern variation pattern determination table includes a jackpot determination result, a special pattern (stop special pattern data), a random number for reach determination, and the number of reserved special symbols (U1 or, U2), a special symbol variation random number value, a special symbol variation pattern, and a special symbol variation time are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" defines at least the determination result of the big hit and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, when a big win is made, the ready-to-win game is always performed. It should be noted that the reach determination random number, the random number range is set to 97 (0-96), the special figure fluctuation random number, the random number range is set to 100 (0-99).

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, as the number of special symbols held (U1 or U2) increases, the average variation time of the special symbols becomes shorter, so that the variation pattern (1) The variation time (Th2) of the variation pattern (2) (shortened variation) is set to be shorter than the variation time (Th1) of the (normal variation). For example, the variation time (Th1) of variation pattern (1) (normal variation) is set to 12 seconds, and the variation time (Th2) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation) is set to 3 seconds. Although the maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the reserved number of special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined after subtracting 1 from the reserved number of special symbols. Therefore, "4" will not be referenced as the pending number.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Or U2), based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for special figure variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined.

Then, based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated, and information on the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", the special symbol variation pattern designation command of the first special symbol display device 20 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 14 is indicated, and the MODE data is When it is "E7H", it indicates the special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol display device 21 corresponding to the game ball winning in the second starting port 15. - 特許庁

Further, in the effect control board 120, as will be described later, the contents of the effect such as the effect pattern 38 are determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern designation command). In the rightmost column of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the contents of the effect such as the effect pattern 38 are described as a reference.

Here, "normal fluctuation" and "shortened fluctuation" as the contents of the production mean that the plurality of production patterns 38 fluctuate at high speed and stop without reaching reach. The shortened variation is different in that the shortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than the normal variation.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means a variation mode that gives the player a sense of anticipation of a big win, such as when a part of the combination of the performance symbols 38 that informs the big win is temporarily stopped and other performance symbols 38 fluctuate. means For example, when a combination of three-digit performance patterns 38 of ``777'' is set as a combination of performance patterns 38 for informing a big hit, the two performance patterns 38 are temporarily stopped at ``7'', and the remaining performance is performed. It refers to a mode in which the pattern 38 is changing. The term "temporary stop" refers to a mode in which the performance pattern 38 shakes slightly or is slightly deformed to give the player the impression that the performance pattern 38 is stopped.

Also, "normal reach" means a reach with a low expectation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit expectation") for executing a jackpot game in which two performance symbols 38 are temporarily stopped and the remaining one performance symbol 38 fluctuates. are doing. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" does not result in a big hit, but the "normal reach" may be configured to result in a big win.
In addition, "SP reach" means super reach, which has higher expectations for big hits than normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect pattern 38 that is not temporarily stopped makes a special change or a special character is displayed.
Further, "SPSP reach" means a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the super reach.
In addition, "full rotation reach" means a state in which all the combinations of a plurality of performance patterns 38 for informing a big win change at a low speed. Represents the reach performed.

In addition, "pseudo consecutive" means that the effect pattern 38 is once temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the lottery of one big win, and the effect pattern 38 is changed and temporarily stopped. It means a variation mode in which the is performed multiple times.

(Preliminary judgment table for jackpot lottery)
12 and 13 are diagrams showing a preliminary determination table for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance. 12 shows a preliminary determination table for the first special symbol display device, and FIG. 13 shows a preliminary determination table for the second special symbol display device.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the preliminary determination table includes a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a special symbol, a random number for determining reach, a random number for special figure fluctuation, and a scheduled fluctuation pattern. are mapped.

Here, it is possible to determine in advance whether it is a "jackpot" or "losing" by the big hit judgment random number obtained when the game ball enters the starting hole, and the type of special pattern (jackpot special You can determine in advance (design, special design for loss).
In addition, since the random number for reach determination and the random number for special figure fluctuation can be determined in advance, the scheduled variation pattern (whether or not reach occurs, the type of reach, etc.) can be determined in advance. It is possible to include the types of jackpots and scheduled variation patterns.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, and the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for determining the special symbol, the random number for judging reach, and A scheduled variation pattern is determined based on the special figure variation random number value. Then, a start opening winning designation command is generated according to the determined scheduled variation pattern.

This starting point winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E8H", the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 14 is indicated, and when the MODE data is "E9H", the second starting It shows the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the opening 15. - 特許庁

In this way, the starting opening winning designation command includes information related to the type of starting opening (first starting opening 14 or second starting opening 15) that has won a prize. Further, as described above, the start opening winning designation command includes information related to the expected variation pattern (scheduled variation pattern) and information related to the type of jackpot. In addition, the starting opening winning designation command includes information about the current game state (whether it is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, a low-probability game state or a high-probability game state) there is

In addition, the prior determination table shown in FIG.12 and FIG.13 is similar to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG.10 and FIG.11. However, while the advance determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 are used when the game ball enters the starting port, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are used when the special symbols start to fluctuate The difference is that the In addition, there is also a difference in whether or not to refer to the "holding number".

Therefore, in the advance determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, it is possible to discriminate the types of big hits and reach, but it is impossible to discriminate only between "normal fluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation" (FIG. 12 and “planned variation pattern” shown in FIG. 13).

12 and 13 is a pre-determination table for the jackpot lottery referred to in the low-probability gaming state. A determination table is also stored in the main ROM 110b.
It should be noted that the jackpot lottery pre-determination table referred to in the high-probability gaming state is configured in the same manner as the pre-determination table shown in FIGS. The value of the random number value for judging the jackpot for judging in advance is different.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a table relating to normal symbols and the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is a diagram showing a winning determination table for a winning lottery, and FIG. It is a figure which shows a design determination table. In addition, FIG. 14(c) is a normal pattern variation pattern determination table for determining the variation time of normal symbols, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the starting port opening mode determination table for determining.

(Hit determination table for winning lottery)
As shown in FIG. 14A, in the hit determination table, presence/absence of the time-saving game state, random numbers for hit determination, and hit determination results are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the win determination table shown in FIG. 14(a), and determines whether it is a “win” or a “lose” based on the current time-saving gaming state and the acquired random number value for win determination. judge. For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 14(a), when it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, one specific hit determination random number value of "0" is determined to be hit. On the other hand, when it is in the time-saving game state, 15 hit determination random numbers from "0" to "14" are determined as hits. If it is a random number value other than the above, it is determined as "losing". Therefore, since the random number range of the hit determination random number is 0 to 15, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/16, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time-saving gaming state is 15. /16.

(Normal design decision table)
As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the normal symbol determination table, presence/absence of a time-saving gaming state, hit determination results, normal symbol determination random numbers, and normal symbols (stop normal symbol data) are associated with each other. there is

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 14(b), and based on the current time-saving game state, the hit determination result, and the obtained random number value for normal symbol determination, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed. Determine (stop normal map data).

Then, at the time of starting the variation of the normal symbols, the main CPU 110a determines the normal pattern designation command as information of the normal symbols based on the determined normal symbol type (stop normal pattern data), and determines the normal pattern designation command. is transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 14(d), the opening state of the start movable piece 15b is determined by the normal pattern (stop normal pattern data). It can be said that it is decided.

(Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 14(c) is a diagram showing a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern (variation time, etc.) as will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 14(c), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is associated with the presence or absence of the time saving gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random number for normal pattern fluctuation, and the normal pattern fluctuation time. ing.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the time of variation.

Then, at the time of starting the variation of the normal symbols, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol variation designation command as the information of the normal symbol variation time based on the determined normal symbol variation time, and determines the normal symbol variation designation command. is transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

As a feature of the general figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. designed to be shorter than

(Determination table for starting opening mode of starting movable piece)
As shown in FIG. 14(d), the start opening mode determination table includes stop normal pattern data (normal pattern), maximum number of openings of start movable piece 15b, opening time of auxiliary game, and second start opening 15. The opening time, the interval time, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. Determine the ending time.

In this embodiment, in the starting port opening state determination table shown in FIG. It is an open mode, and the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 03 is an opening mode more advantageous than the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 02.

Then, as shown in the normal symbol determination table of FIG. 14(b), when winning is achieved in the time-saving game state, stop normal symbol data=03, which is the most advantageous release mode, is selected. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the start movable piece 15b operates more advantageously for the player than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 15(a) shows special figure determination information (random number for judging a big hit, special symbol determination Random number, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure fluctuation) is a diagram showing a special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a diagram showing the configuration, FIG. 15(c) shows normal pattern determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 (random value for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, normal pattern fluctuation Random number) is stored in the general pattern determination information storage area, and FIG. 15D is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit in the general pattern determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the special figure determination information storage area stores special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14. First special figure determination information holding storage A second special figure determination information holding storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 15 is stored, and a special figure determination information during execution of the variable display is stored. The first special figure determination information holding storage area and the second special figure determination information holding storage area are divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively. there is

In addition, the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is the first special design reservation number (U1), and these undetermined The number of reserved icons corresponding to the special figure determination information is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 72a, and the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is the second special symbol The number of pending (U2), the number of pending icons corresponding to these undetermined special figure determination information is displayed in the second pending icon display area 72b, and the variable display (variable effect) stored in the special figure execution storage area The variation icon corresponding to the special figure determination information being executed is displayed in the variation icon display area 73 .

In addition, the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is the first reservation number display area provided in the image display device 31 Displayed as a number in 74a, the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is displayed as a number in the second reservation number display area 74b provided in the image display device 31 will be

As shown in FIG. 15(b), each storage unit includes a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number area for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into a numerical value storage area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing reach determination random number values, and a special figure variation random number storage area for storing special figure variation random number values.

Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 14 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is included in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number that is not stored. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 15 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is included in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number that is not stored.

In the special figure execution storage area, when the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage of the first special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the first special It is referred to execute variable display of symbols. Further, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. is referenced to perform

As shown in FIG. 15(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area is a normal pattern determination information holding storage area in which the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 13 is stored. It is composed of a general pattern execution storage area in which the general pattern determination information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the general pattern determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. In addition, the number of undetermined general pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the general pattern determination information retention storage area is the number of normal pattern retention (G).

As shown in FIG. 15(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number, and a normal symbol determination random number for storing a normal symbol determination random number. It is divided into a numerical value storage area and a random number storage area for normal figure fluctuation for storing random numbers for normal figure fluctuation. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 and the normal pattern determination information is acquired, the normal pattern determination information is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. The acquired general pattern determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number.

In the normal pattern execution storage area, when the starting condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is established, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage part of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the normal pattern variable display is performed. Referenced to run.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing in the main control board 110 .

When power is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process consisting of steps S1 to S14. Specifically, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S1.

In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is set in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is set, the process moves to step S3, and if the backup flag is not set, the process moves to step S11.

In step S3, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c. In step S4, the main CPU 110a compares the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c at the time of the previous power failure with the newly calculated checksum. It determines whether it is normal or not. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S5, and if the checksum is not normal, there is an abnormality in the data stored in the main RAM 110c (the control state before power-off cannot be restored normally). ), the process proceeds to step S11.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 111a is ON. If the RAM clear switch 111a is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S6 assuming that the process at the time of power restoration is to be performed. The process is moved to S12.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets the RAM when power is restored. By performing this processing, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal prize winning error flag, a magnetic detection error flag, and a winning frequency abnormal error flag, which will be described later, among the backup flags stored in the main RAM 110c, in predetermined areas of the main RAM 110c. If so, clear these flags. That is, an abnormal winning error flag indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred, a magnetic detection error flag indicating that a magnetic detection error has occurred, and a winning frequency abnormality indicating that a winning frequency abnormality error has occurred As for the error flag, if it was set before the power was turned off, it will be cleared when the power is restored.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a initializes the devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the production control board 120, the setting of the CTC (CounterTimerCircuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a sets a power restoration command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S9. . As a result, the power restoration command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs the process for executing the power restoration notification.

Note that the power restoration notification means that the image display device 31 displays a power restoration screen (for example, the error notification dedicated image 300B in FIG. 99) indicating that the power has been restored, or the audio output device 32 notifies that the power has been restored. to output a power restoration notification sound indicating that the The power restoration notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 99 and the like.

It should be noted that the information indicating the current game state may not be included in the power restoration command, and the game state designation command indicating the current game state may be transmitted before or after the power restoration command is transmitted.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage designation command indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the number of special symbol reservations, and the image display device 31 displays the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon. will be processed to display.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage specifying command indicating the normal symbol reserved number (G) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol memory specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the normal symbol memory number.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a clears all areas of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM when the power is turned on, and shifts the process to step S13.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM when the power is turned on, and shifts the process to step S13. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized to the initial state.

Here, in step S12, the main CPU 110a also clears an abnormal prize winning error flag, a magnetic detection error flag, and a winning frequency abnormal error flag, which will be described later, in the main RAM 110c if they are set to ON.

In the following description, turning on the power (with the operation of the RAM clear switch 111a) while the RAM clear switch 111a is ON may be referred to as "RAM clear operation". Power-on without operation of the RAM clear switch 111a may be described as "power recovery operation".

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the abnormal winning error flag, the magnetic detection error flag, and the abnormal winning frequency error flag are cleared by performing one of the RAM clearing operation and the power restoration operation. The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the abnormal prize winning error flag, the magnetic detection error flag, and the winning frequency abnormal error flag are not cleared by the power restoration operation, and are cleared when the RAM clear operation is performed. may be cleared only after

In step S13, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting of devices peripheral to the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the production control board 120, the setting of the CTC (CounterTimerCircuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a sets a RAM clear command indicating that the game control state has been initialized (RAM cleared) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S15. Thereby, the RAM clear command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs the processing for executing the RAM clear notification.

Note that the RAM clear notification means that the image display device 31 displays a notification image (for example, an error notification dedicated image 300A in FIG. A RAM clear notification sound indicating that the main RAM 110c has been initialized is output. The RAM clear notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 98 and the like.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) and the special symbol variation random number value. The initial random number, the initial random number for special symbol determination, the initial random number for hit determination, and the initial random number for normal symbol determination are updated.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from a power failure detection circuit provided on the power supply substrate 140 . If power failure has occurred, the process proceeds to step S18, and if power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S15 so that the process loops.

The main CPU 110a prohibits the timer interrupt in step S18, clears the output port in step S19, calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S20 and sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S21. In step S22, a backup flag to be referred to when recovering from power failure is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S22, access to the main RAM 110c is prohibited, and the system waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

When the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, the checksum of all the used areas of the main RAM 110c is calculated and compared. A sum may be calculated and compared.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds), thereby executing timer interrupt processing described below.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a to the stack area.

The main CPU 110a performs time control processing in step S110. Specifically, the update process of the special symbol time counter, the update process of the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the update process of the normal symbol time counter, the update process of the opening and closing time of the starting movable piece 15b, etc. update (decrease by 1) the various timer counters.

The main CPU 110a performs random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, a process of updating the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for determining the special symbol, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for determining the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal figure fluctuation is performed. More specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by one. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and each random number is newly updated from the initial random number at that time. .

The main CPU 110a performs initial random value update processing in step S130. Specifically, a process of updating (adding 1 to) the initial random number value for big hit determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the big winning opening detection switch 16a, the first start opening detection switch 14a, the second start opening detection switch 15a, and the gate detection switch 13a. , when there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process in step S300. Specifically, a process for controlling the big winning lottery, variable display of special symbols, opening and closing of the big winning opening 16, change of the game state, and the like is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal/universal electric power control processing. Specifically, processing for controlling winning lottery, variable display of normal symbols, opening and closing of the starting movable piece 15b, and the like is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, each winning ball counter is referred to, a payout number specifying command corresponding to each winning hole is generated and set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the payout number designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 130, and the process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the payout number designation command from the payout device is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs error detection processing in step S600. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various errors such as an abnormal prize winning error, a magnetism detection error, and a prize frequency abnormal error are detected is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs error cancellation processing in step S610. Specifically, in the case where various error events such as winning frequency error, door open error, etc. are detected, processing is performed to determine whether or not the error event has been eliminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs game progress data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the external information signal output from the external terminal board 30, the driving data of the starting opening opening/closing solenoid 15c, the driving data of the winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, the display data of the first special symbol display device 20, and the second special symbol. Display data of the display device 21, display data of the normal design display device 22, display data of the first special design reservation display device 23, display data of the second special design reservation display device 24, display data of the normal design reservation display device 25, etc. A process for creating output data relating to the progress of the game is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S800. Specifically, processing for outputting various display data created in step S700 is performed. In addition, processing for transmitting commands set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and the transmission buffer to the effect control board 120 and the payout control board 130 is also performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, and if the detection signal has been input, a process of adding 1 to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening is performed.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the big winning opening detection switch 16a, and if the detection signal has been input, a process of adding 1 to the winning ball counter for the big winning opening is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start opening detection switch 14a, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the first start opening, and the first special If the number of reserved symbols (U1) is less than 4, the first special reserved number of symbols (U1) is added by 1, and the special figure determination information is acquired to obtain a predetermined storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area (first storage section to fourth storage section). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 15a is input, and when the detection signal is input, the prize ball counter for the second starting port is incremented by 1, and the second If the special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is added by 1, and the special figure determination information is acquired to obtain the special figure determination information storage area. storage section to fourth storage section). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing, and terminates the current input control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, and if the normal design reservation number (G) is less than 4 when the detection signal is input, the normal design reservation number (G) is Along with adding 1, perform processing to acquire the general pattern determination information and store it in a predetermined storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the general pattern determination information storage area.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
19, the first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 14a. If the detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if the detection signal is not input, the current first starting port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter (three prize ball counter) for the first starting port used for prize balls and updating it.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-3. When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-4, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port of this time Terminate the detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first reserved special symbol number (U1) and stores it in step S230-4, and stores the special symbol indicating the first reserved special symbol number (U1) in step S230-5. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the first pending icon on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information and sequentially searches for an empty storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area. Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs preliminary determination processing in step S230-7. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 12, the type of special symbol display device, the random number value for determining the jackpot acquired this time, the random number value for determining the special symbol, the random number value for reach determination, and Perform processing to determine the scheduled variation pattern based on the random number for special figure variation.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a sets a start-up winning designation command indicating the scheduled variation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S230-7 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

As a result, the starting opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14 this time (1, or To execute a look-ahead performance that is determined based on the result of prior determination and foretells the possibility of execution of a jackpot game (makes the player expect the execution of the jackpot game) over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols. becomes possible.

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch on the main control board)
The second start opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 . FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 15a. If the detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and if the detection signal has not been input, the current second starting opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter (one prize ball counter) for the second starting hole used for prize balls and updating it.

In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being played. If not during the auxiliary game, the process proceeds to step S240-5, and if during the auxiliary game, in step S240-4, 1 is added to the second start opening winning ball counter (D) and updated.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol pending number (U2) is less than 4 in step S240-5. When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-6, and when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, this second start port Terminate the detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) in step S240-6 and stores it, and in step S240-7 special symbol storage indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2). The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the second pending icon on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information and sequentially searches for an empty storage unit from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area. Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs preliminary determination processing in step S240-9. Specifically, referring to the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 13, the type of special symbol display device, the random number for jackpot determination acquired this time, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and Perform processing to determine the scheduled variation pattern based on the random number for special figure variation.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets a start-up winning designation command indicating the scheduled variation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S240-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the command in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. 2 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

As a result, the starting opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 15 is started (1, or To execute a look-ahead performance that is determined based on the result of prior determination and foretells the possibility of execution of a jackpot game (makes the player expect the execution of the jackpot game) over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols. becomes possible.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, and if the special figure special electric processing data=0, the processing is shifted to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310), and the special figure special electric processing data=1. If so, the process is moved to special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is moved to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot The processing is shifted to the game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data=4, the processing is shifted to the jackpot game end processing (step S350).

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, the necessary subroutines are appropriately processed in the progress of the game. Become.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, big hit determination processing, special symbol determination processing for determining special symbols to be stopped and displayed, variation time determination processing for determining the variation time of special symbols, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed is performed, and when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a process of shifting to a special symbol stop process of step S330 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing, and terminates the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, along with performing processing corresponding to the special symbols (jackpot symbol, losing symbol) that are stopped and displayed, the number of time-saving games (J), the time-saving game flag, the number of high-probability games (X), and the high-probability game flag are set. Perform the setting process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process, and ends the current special figure special electric control process. Specifically, a process of controlling the jackpot game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot game end processing, and ends the current special figure special electric control processing. Specifically, a high probability game state or a probability game state of a low probability game state is determined, and a process of determining a game state of a time saving game state or a non-time saving game state is performed. . Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed (special symbol time counter = 0), The process moves to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-3, and when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. to move.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reservation number (U2) to update it, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. When it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, step S318- Move to 1.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the first special symbol reservation number (U1) to update it, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination information retention storage area corresponding to the special symbol retention number (U) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Perform information shift (storage area shift). Specifically, each special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information storage area or the second special figure determination information storage area from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored one before shift to the Here, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous special symbol variation display already written in the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit) is erased.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is preferentially subtracted from the first special symbol reservation number (U1), but the first special symbol is in the order of winning the starting port. The number of reservations (U1) and the number of second special design reservations (U2) may be subtracted, or the number of first special design reservations (U1) is preferentially subtracted over the number of second special design reservations (U2). You may make it

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a receives a special symbol indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) or the second special symbol reserved number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. A symbol memory designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol memory designation command is set in a performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the number of the first pending icon or the second pending icon displayed on the image display device 31 is reduced, the first pending icon, or A process of changing the second reserved icon to the variable icon is performed.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. With reference to the special symbol determination table shown in 6, the special symbol display device (type of start port) and the type of special symbol (stop Toku-zu data) is determined. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S312. Specifically, referring to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 11, the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol, the number of special symbol reservations (U), A variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on the random number for reach determination stored in the special figure execution storage area and the random number for special figure variation.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 performs the processing for executing the variation performance corresponding to the variation pattern so as to correspond to the variable display of the special symbols. .

In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state at the start of fluctuation, and sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped in the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

The main CPU 110a starts variable display of special symbols in step S316. Specifically, the variable display data of the special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. Then, the variable display of the special symbols is performed by the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 .

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data=1, prepares to move to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 24, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing.

In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state (standby state) in which the variable display of special symbols and the jackpot game are not being executed. If there is a customer waiting state flag, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the processing is moved to step S318-2.

In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. The specified command is set in the performance transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the customer waiting effect is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

(Jackpot judgment processing of the main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 . FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big win. Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the first special figure determination information holding storage area, the big hit lottery shown in FIG. Referring to the jackpot determination table, if the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the second special figure determination information holding storage area, the jackpot shown in FIG. 5 (b) A lottery jackpot determination table is referred to, and whether or not it is a "jackpot" is determined based on the jackpot determination random number value stored in the special figure execution storage area. If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-2, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-5.

In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot symbol determination process. Specifically, referring to the special symbol determination table for the big hit shown in FIG. 6(b), based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the special symbol execution storage area, the type of the special symbol for the big hit to be stopped and displayed. is determined, and stop special figure data corresponding to the type of the determined big hit special symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

It should be noted that the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area is used for determining whether or not it is a "jackpot symbol" in the special symbol stop processing of FIG. , and is also used to determine the game state after the end of the big win in the big win game ending process of FIG.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a sets the big hit effect symbol designation command corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-2 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the type of the big hit special symbol stopped and displayed on the effect control board 120 (stop special symbol data) can be grasped.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a determines the game state when the jackpot is won from the information set in the game state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area), and determines the game state when the jackpot is won. is set in the game state buffer. Specifically, if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are not set, 00H is set, and if the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set, 01H is set, If the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, 02H is set, and if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

The reason why we set the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in the game state buffer separately from the game state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area) is that during the jackpot game Since the high-probability game flag and time-saving game flag in the state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area) are reset, based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot after the jackpot, a new This is because the game state storage area cannot be referred to when determining the game state at the end of the jackpot. For this reason, by providing a game state buffer for storing game information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot separately from the game state storage area, by referring to the game information in the game state buffer after the jackpot is completed, Based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, a new game state after the end of the jackpot (time-saving game state, number of time-saving games, etc.) can be set.

The main CPU 110a performs a losing symbol determination process in step S311-5. Specifically, referring to the special symbol determination table for the loss shown in FIG. 6(a), based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the special symbol execution storage area, the type of the lost special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, and the stop special figure data corresponding to the type of the determined loss special symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command for losing corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-5 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, End the jackpot determination process. As a result, the effect symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the type of the lost special symbol stopped and displayed on the effect control board 120 (stop special symbol data) can be grasped.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable time set in the special symbol time counter has elapsed in step S320-1. When the variation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing of this time is terminated, and when the variation time has elapsed, the processing is moved to step S320-2.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops the variable display of the special symbols. Specifically, the variable display data set in step S316 is cleared, and the special symbols set in steps S311-2 and S311-5 are displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 20. Stop display data for causing the symbol display device 21 to stop display is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21, and the player is notified of the big hit determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol determination command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the design determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for ending the variable effect.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) for stopping and displaying the special symbols in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is updated by subtracting 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 2, prepares to move to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 25, and ends the current special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a determines in step S330-1 whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (is the special symbol time counter=0?). When the symbol stop time has passed, the process is moved to step S330-2, and when the symbol stop time has not passed, the special symbol stop process of this time is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs time-saving game end determination processing in step S330-2. Specifically, when the time saving game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, the number of time saving games (J) is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the new number of time saving games (J) is "0" determine whether As a result, when the number of time-saving games (J) is "0", the time-saving game flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S330-3. On the other hand, if the time saving game flag is not set or if the number of time saving games (J) is not "0", the process proceeds directly to step S330-3.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs high-probability game end determination processing. Specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, the high-probability game count (X) is updated by subtracting 1, and the new high-probability game count (X) is "0". Determine whether or not there is As a result, when the high-probability game count (X) is "0", the high-probability game flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S330-4. On the other hand, if the high-probability game flag is not set, or if the number of high-probability games (X) is not "0", the process proceeds directly to step S330-4.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped in the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a jackpot symbol in step S330-5. If it is a jackpot pattern, the process goes to step S330-7, and if it is not a jackpot pattern, the process goes to step S330-6.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 0, prepares to move to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 22, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to 3, and prepares to shift the processing to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a performs normal game state transition processing. Specifically, the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game count (X), the time-saving game flag, and the time-saving game count (J) are cleared, and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process in step S330-9. Specifically, referring to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, the type of the jackpot game is determined based on the stop special figure data, and the jackpot opening mode for the jackpot shown in FIG. 9 is determined. Large winning opening mode determination table (“first big winning table”, “second big winning table”, “third big winning table”, “fourth big winning table”, “fifth big winning table”) according to the type of big winning game from the table group table").

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game (first jackpot game to fifth jackpot game) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the opening effect of the big winning game is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the jackpot game to the special game timer counter, and terminates this special symbol stop process. Specifically, the opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot game is determined from the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, and set in the special game timer counter. It should be noted that the special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Jackpot game processing on the main control board)
The jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the jackpot game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the number of round games (R) storage area. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S340-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to step S340-6.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed in step S340-2. If the opening time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated, and if the opening time has passed, the process proceeds to step S340-3.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a sets 1 to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of openings (K), and energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c is set, and the large winning opening opening mode determined in step S330-9 is determined. Referring to the table (see FIG. 9), based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the opening time of the big winning opening 16 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the big winning opening 16 is opened.

The main CPU 110a performs round designation command transmission determination processing in step S340-5. Specifically, when the number of opening times (K) is "1", that is, when a round game is started, a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) is stored in the main RAM 110c for effect transmission data. Set to area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs the process for executing the round effect of the jackpot game.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently ending. The ending is a period after all preset round games are completed. If it is during the ending, the process moves to step S340-18, and if it is not during the ending, the process moves to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the big winning opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c is set. If the big winning opening is closed, the process goes to step S340-8, and if the big winning opening is not closed, the process goes to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the big winning opening set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4 to open the big winning opening.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an opening end condition for ending the opening of the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches a specified number (9) or the opening time per time in the number of opening times (K) elapses. Determine whether or not it is established. When it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c is cleared, and the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in the above step S330-9 is referred to, and the current Based on the number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the closing time (closing interval time or one closing time) of the big winning opening 16 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the big winning opening 16 is closed.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-11 whether or not one round has ended. Specifically, whether or not either the value of the winning ball counter (C) for the big winning opening reaches a specified number (9) or the number of openings (K) reaches the maximum number of openings. determine whether If one round has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12, and if one round has not been completed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs round data initialization processing in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of openings (K) and the winning ball counter (C) are cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) has reached the maximum number of round games. If it is the maximum number of round games played, the process moves to step S340-15, and if it is not the maximum number of round games, the process moves to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of round games (R) and stores it, and ends the current jackpot game process.

In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a clears the number of round games played (R), and in step S340-16, based on the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. , the type of the special game is determined, and an ending designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the ending specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the ending effect of the big winning game is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

At step S340-17, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot game to the special game timer counter based on the big winning opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined at step S330-9. set.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed in step S340-18. When the ending time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-19, and when the ending time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to 4, prepares to move to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG. 27, and ends the jackpot game processing this time.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area and the game state information in the game state buffer in step S350-1.

The main CPU 110a performs high probability game flag setting processing in step S350-2. Specifically, referring to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information, whether to shift to the high probability game state at the end of the jackpot game If it is determined whether to shift to the high probability game state, a high probability game flag indicating that it is in the high probability game state is set in the high probability game flag storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", a high probability game flag is set.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing. Specifically, referring to the set data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and game state information, it is the number of times of variable display that can be executed in the high probability game state. A high-probability game number (X) is determined, and the determined high-probability game number (X) is set in a high-probability game number (X) storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", 10000 times is set as the high probability game frequency (X).

The main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process in step S350-4. Specifically, referring to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and game information, it is determined whether to shift to the time saving game state at the end of the jackpot game. When it determines and makes it shift to a time saving game state, the time saving game flag which shows that it is a time saving game state is set to the time saving game flag storage area. For example, when the game state information is 01H, 02H, or 03H, the time saving game flag is set.

The main CPU 110a performs time-saving game count determination processing in step S350-5. Specifically, referring to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. The number of games (J) is determined, and the determined number of time-saving games (J) is set in the number of time-saving games (J) storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "04", 10000 times is set to the number of times of time saving games (J).

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a identifies the game state by checking the presence or absence of the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag, and sends a game state designation command indicating the identified game state to the effect transmission data storage area. set. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 0, prepares to shift the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 22, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(Public power control processing of the main control board)
Using FIG. 28, the normal/universal power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal power control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the normal pattern normal electric processing data, and if the normal pattern general electric processing data = 0, the process shifts to the normal symbol variation processing (step S410), and the normal pattern normal electric processing data If =1, the process is shifted to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

This "general and general electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the general and general electric control processing as will be described later, so that the necessary subroutines are appropriately processed in the progress of the game. It will be.

In step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol variation process, and terminates the current normal pattern normal electric control process. Specifically, hit determination processing, processing for displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner, processing for displaying the normal symbols in a stopped state, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S420, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game process, and terminates the current general/universal electric power control process. Specifically, the process of controlling the auxiliary game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Normal pattern variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. When the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S410-9, and when the normal symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more in step S410-2. When the normal design reserved number (G) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and when the normal design reserved number (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal design variation process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the number of reserved normal symbols (G) to update it, and shifts the process to step S410-4.

In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area. Specifically, each normal figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the normal pattern execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous normal symbol fluctuation display that has already been written in the general figure execution storage area (0th storage unit) is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-5. Specifically, by referring to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 14(a), it is determined whether or not the game is hit based on the game state and the hit determination random number value stored in the normal pattern execution storage area. .

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. The normal pattern (stop normal pattern data) is determined, the determined stop normal pattern data is set in the stop normal pattern data storage area, and the normal pattern designation command corresponding to the stop normal pattern data is stored in the main RAM 110c as performance transmission data. Set to area. Thereby, the general pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the stop general pattern data can be grasped in the production control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol variation time determination processing. Specifically, referring to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. A symbol variation time is determined and set in a normal symbol time counter, and a normal symbol variation designation command corresponding to the normal symbol variation time is set in a performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal pattern fluctuation specification command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 can usually grasp the fluctuation time of the pattern.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a starts variable display of normal symbols, and ends the current normal symbol variation process. Specifically, the variable display data of normal symbols are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the display data for variably displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 22 is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the normal symbol display device 22 displays the normal symbols. A variable display will be performed.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable time set in the normal symbol time counter has elapsed. If the variation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the variation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S410-10.

The main CPU 110a stops the variable display of normal symbols in step S410-10. Specifically, the variable display data set in step S410-8 is cleared, and the stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal design set in step S410-6 on the normal design display device 22 is used as the main display data. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22, and the player is notified of the hit determination result.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop normal pattern data set in the stop normal pattern data storage area is a winning normal pattern. If it is a winning normal symbol, the process is moved to step S410-12, and if it is not a winning normal symbol, this normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets normal/universal electrical processing data=1, prepares to shift to the auxiliary game process shown in FIG. 30, and performs opening mode determination processing in step S410-13. Specifically, referring to the start opening mode determination table shown in FIG. Determines the opening time, interval time, and ending time of the auxiliary game.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the auxiliary game to the auxiliary game timer counter, and terminates this normal symbol variation process. It should be noted that the auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Auxiliary game processing of the main control board)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently opening. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S420-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to step S420-4.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has passed in step S420-2. If the opening time has not passed, the current auxiliary game process is terminated, and if the opening time has passed, the process proceeds to step S420-3.

In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs the second start opening opening process, and ends the current auxiliary game process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (S), energization data for energizing the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is set, and the opening of the second starting port 15 corresponding to the number of times of opening (S) is performed. Set the time in the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is opened.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently ending. If it is during the ending, the process moves to step S420-12, and if it is not during the ending, the process moves to step S420-5.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 15 is closed (interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is set. If the second starting port 15 is closed, the process proceeds to step S420-6, and if the second starting port 15 is not closed, the process proceeds to step S420-7.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time (interval time) of the second starting port 15 set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed in step S420-6. If the closing time has not elapsed, the current auxiliary processing is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-3 to open the second starting port 15. FIG.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an opening end condition for ending the opening of the second starting port 15 is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the second start opening winning ball counter (D) reaches a specified number (10) or the opening time per time in the number of openings (S) elapses. is established. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S420-8, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting opening closing process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is cleared, and the closing time of the second starting port 15 determined in step S410-13 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is closed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game ends in step S420-9. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times (S) of opening the second starting port has reached the maximum number of times of opening. If the auxiliary game is to be terminated, the process proceeds to step S420-10, and if the auxiliary game is not to be terminated, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game end processing in step S420-10. Specifically, the number of opening times (S) and the second start opening winning ball counter (D) are cleared.

In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time determined in step S410-13 to the auxiliary game timer counter.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed in step S420-12. If the ending time has passed, the process proceeds to step S420-13, and if the ending time has not passed, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the normal pattern normal electric processing data, prepares to shift the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 29, and ends the current auxiliary game processing.

(Error detection processing)
The error detection processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing error detection processing in the main control board 110 .

It should be noted that in this specification, strictly speaking, "occurrence of an error" means that when an irregular event defined as an error occurs, such as an event such as power restoration or an abnormal winning frequency, It can be understood that it means detecting (detecting) the occurrence of an event.

For example, the phenomenon of "recovery of power supply" is based on the viewpoint that the state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 for the player's game is a normal state (in other words, a normal state). It can also be said that an event in which the power of the gaming machine 1 is switched from an OFF state to an ON state is a kind of abnormality (error).

In the following description, an event defined as an error in the gaming machine 1 (irregular event, see types of errors in FIG. 96) may simply be described as an "error" or an "error event". .

In the following description, error notifications such as RAM clear notification, magnetic detection error notification, and door open error notification, which will be described later, may be collectively referred to simply as "error notification".

In step S600-1, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not abnormal winning has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a continuously detects the game ball for a certain period of time (for example, 1 second) at the game ball detection switch (in this embodiment, the big winning opening detection switch 16a) that detects the game ball. (When game ball detection continues), or when the game ball detection switch detects a predetermined number or more of game balls within a predetermined time (for example, 3 or more within 0.5 seconds), an abnormal winning occurs. It is determined that If abnormal winning is detected, the process moves to step S600-2, and if abnormal winning is not detected, the process moves to step S600-4.

In this embodiment, an example in which abnormal winning error is detected by detection of the big winning opening detection switch 16a is shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the abnormal winning error is detected by other game ball detection switches (eg, first start opening detection switch, second start opening detection switch, general winning opening detection switch, etc.). good too. Further, detection of an abnormal prize winning error may be performed by a plurality of game ball detection switches. For example, all of the big winning opening detection switch, the first starting opening detecting switch, the second starting opening detecting switch, and the general winning opening detecting switch may be targets for whether abnormal winning has occurred.

In step S600-2, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal prize winning error designation command indicating detection of abnormal prize winning in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S600-3. As a result, the abnormal winning error specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for executing abnormal winning error notification.

Note that the abnormal winning error notification means displaying an abnormal winning error screen (for example, an error notification dedicated image 300C in FIG. It is to output an abnormal prize winning error notification sound indicating that it has occurred. The abnormal prize winning error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 100 and the like.

In step S600-3, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal winning error flag indicating occurrence of an abnormal winning in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the current error detection process.

In step S600-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a magnetic detection error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that a magnetism detection error has occurred when the magnetic sensor 17 detects magnetism for a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms). If a magnetic detection error is detected, the process proceeds to step S600-5, and if no magnetic detection error is detected, the process proceeds to step S600-7.

In step S600-5, the main CPU 110a sets a magnetic detection error designation command indicating detection of a magnetic detection error in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S600-6. As a result, the magnetic detection error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for executing the magnetic detection error notification.

Note that the magnetic detection error notification means displaying a magnetic detection error screen (for example, an error notification dedicated image 300D in FIG. 101) indicating that a magnetic detection error has occurred on the image display device 31, It is to output a magnetic detection error notification sound indicating that an error has occurred. The magnetic detection error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 101 and the like.

In step S600-6, the main CPU 110a sets a magnetic detection error flag indicating the occurrence of a magnetic detection error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the current error detection processing.

In step S600-7, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not a winning frequency abnormality error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first start hole 14 with respect to a predetermined number of game balls shot during the low base state (during non-electric support) (for example, 100 shots) When 20 game balls enter the first starting port 14 during the shooting of ), it is determined that a winning frequency abnormality error has occurred. More specifically, when 100 game balls are detected by the out-ball detection switch 11a and 20 or more game balls are detected by the first start hole detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a determines the winning frequency. Determine that an abnormal error has occurred. When the winning frequency abnormality error is detected, the process is moved to step S600-8, and when the winning frequency abnormality error is not detected, the process is moved to step S600-10.

In step S600-8, the main CPU 110a sets a winning frequency abnormality error designation command indicating that a winning frequency abnormality error has been detected in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates this error detection process. As a result, the winning frequency abnormality error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for executing the winning frequency abnormality error notification.

Note that the winning frequency abnormality error notification means that the image display device 31 displays a winning frequency abnormality error screen (for example, an error notification dedicated image 300E in FIG. 102) indicating that a winning frequency abnormality error has occurred, or to output a winning frequency abnormality error notification sound indicating that a winning frequency abnormality error has occurred. The winning frequency abnormality error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 102 and the like.

In step S600-9, the main CPU 110a sets a winning frequency abnormality error flag indicating occurrence of a winning frequency abnormality error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the current error detection process. The main CPU 110a cancels the winning frequency abnormality error by clearing the winning frequency abnormality error flag when the power is restored or when the RAM is cleared.

In step S600-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a door open error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a detects a door open error when the door open switch 133 is in the OFF state. If the door opening error is detected, the process moves to step S600-11, and if the door opening error is not detected, the process moves to step S600-13.

In step S600-11, the main CPU 110a sets a door opening start designation command indicating that a door opening error has been detected in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S600-12. As a result, the door opening start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for executing the door opening error notification.

Note that the door open error notification means that the image display device 31 displays a door open error screen (for example, the error notification dedicated image 300F in FIG. 103) indicating that a door open error has occurred, or the voice output device 32 For example, a door opening error notification sound is output to indicate that an error has occurred. The door open error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 103 and the like.

In step S600-12, the main CPU 110a sets a door open error flag indicating the occurrence of a door open error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the current error detection process.

In step S600-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a switch disconnection error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a detects a switch disconnection error when the actual connection of the switch to be connected to the main control board 110 is defective (including complete disconnection). If a switch disconnection error is detected, the process moves to step S600-14, and if a switch disconnection error is not detected, the process moves to step S600-16.

In step S600-14, the main CPU 110a sets a switch disconnection error start designation command indicating detection of a switch disconnection error in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S600-15. As a result, the switch disconnection error start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for executing the switch disconnection error notification.

Note that the switch disconnection error notification refers to displaying a switch disconnection error screen (for example, an error notification dedicated image 300G in FIG. 104) indicating that a switch disconnection error has occurred on the image display device 31, or to output a switch disconnection error notification sound indicating that a switch disconnection error has occurred. The switch disconnection error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 104 and the like.

In step S600-15, the main CPU 110a sets a switch disconnection error flag indicating the occurrence of a switch disconnection error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the current error detection process.

In step S600-16, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not a plate full error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a detects a full-dish error when the full-dish detection switch 136 detects that the tray 40 is full. If a plate full error is detected, the process proceeds to step S600-17, and if a plate full error is not detected, the current error detection process is terminated.

In step S600-17, the main CPU 110a sets a full-dish error start designation command indicating detection of a full-dish error in the main RAM 110c performance transmission data storage area, and shifts the process to step S600-18. As a result, the full-dish error start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the full-dish error notification is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

Note that the full-dish error notification means displaying a full-dish error screen (for example, an error notification dedicated image 300H in FIG. 105) indicating that a full-dish error has occurred on the image display device 31, or To output a full tank error notification sound indicating that a tank error has occurred. The plate full error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 105 and the like.

In step S600-18, the main CPU 110a sets a full-dish error flag indicating the occurrence of a full-dish error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the current error detection process.

(Error cancellation processing)
The error cancellation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing error cancellation processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S610-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a door open flag indicating the occurrence of a door open error. If there is a door open flag, the process moves to step S610-2, and if there is no door open flag, the process moves to step S610-5.

In step S610-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ON state of the door opening switch 133 has been detected. If the ON state of the door opening switch 133 is detected, the process proceeds to step S610-3, and if the ON state of the door opening switch 133 is not detected, the current error cancellation process is terminated.

In step S610-3, the main CPU 110a sets a door opening end designation command indicating that the door opening error has been resolved in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S610-4. As a result, the door opening end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for ending the door opening error notification by the effect control board 120 is performed.

In step S610-4, the main CPU 110a clears the door open flag and terminates the current error cancellation process.

In step S610-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a switch disconnection error flag indicating the occurrence of a switch disconnection error. If there is a switch disconnection error flag, the process moves to step S610-6, and if there is no switch disconnection error flag, the process moves to step S610-9.

In step S610-6, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not connection of the switch has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the connection failure (including complete disconnection) of each switch to be connected to the main control board 110 is eliminated and each switch is in a connected state. If the connection states of all the switches to be connected to the main control board 110 are detected, the process moves to step S610-7, and at least some of the switches to be connected to the main control board 110 are connected. If the state is not detected, the current error cancellation processing is terminated.

In step S610-7, the main CPU 110a sets a switch disconnection error end designation command indicating that the switch disconnection error has been resolved in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S610-8. As a result, the switch disconnection error end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for ending the switch disconnection error notification by the effect control board 120 is performed.

In step S610-8, the main CPU 110a clears the switch disconnection error flag, and terminates the current error release processing.

In step S610-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a full-dish error flag indicating the occurrence of a full-dish error. If there is a full plate error flag, the process proceeds to step S610-10, and if there is no full plate error flag, this error canceling process is terminated.

In step S610-10, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not the OFF state of the plate full detection switch 136 has been detected. If the OFF state of the full-dish detection switch 136 is detected, the process proceeds to step S610-11, and if the OFF state of the full-dish detection switch 136 is not detected, the current error canceling process is terminated. do.

In step S610-11, the main CPU 110a sets a full-dish error end designation command indicating that the full-dish error has been resolved in the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area, and shifts the process to step S610-12. As a result, the full-dish error end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing for ending the full-dish error notification by the effect control board 120 is performed.

In step S610-12, the main CPU 110a clears the full plate error flag and terminates the current error cancellation process.

(Main processing of production control section)
Processing executed by the sub CPU 120a in the effect control section 120m will be described. First, using FIG. 33, the main processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing main processing in the effect control section 120m.

First, the sub CPU 120a performs initialization processing in step S1000. In this processing, the sub CPU 120a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 120b in response to power-on, and performs processing to initialize and set flags stored in the sub RAM 120c. In this process, if an icon non-appearance flag, which will be described later, is set in a predetermined backup area provided in the sub-RAM 120c, the sub CPU 120a does not clear the icon non-appearance flag and sets other flags. is initialized and set. More specifically, when the icon non-appearance flag is set in a predetermined backup area and the received command is the power restoration command, the sub CPU 120a does not clear the icon non-appearance flag, Initialize and set the flags of When the icon non-appearance flag is set in a predetermined backup area and the received command is a RAM clear command, the sub CPU 120a clears the icon non-appearance flag and initializes other flags. and perform the setting process.

The sub CPU 120a performs sub random number update processing in step S1100. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process of step S1100 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
Timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the effect control section 120m. In addition, although not shown, a clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (2 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 120m, and a timer interrupt processing program is read, and the effect control board timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the effect control unit 120m generates a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 120m (not shown), and stores the received command in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. It has become.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 120a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters used in the effect control section 120m.

In step S1600, the sub CPU 120a inputs the signal of the production button detection switch 35a in the customer waiting state performed in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol or the special game (jackpot game) is not executed, or in the customer waiting state. If a signal from the effect button detection switch 35a or the like is input, a customer waiting effect control process for controlling the display of a menu guidance image (not shown) is performed.

In step S1610, the sub CPU 120a performs icon appearance completion determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a performs processing for making an icon appear and display when there is an icon non-appearance flag, which will be described later. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the display (appearance) of the icon is completed. Perform processing to clear.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the lever operation detection switch 36b are input via the frame control board 180, and inputs the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a, etc. If so, effect input control processing for transmitting a effect button signal or the like to the image control unit 150 is performed.

In step S1800, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c to the frame control board 180 and the image control section 150. FIG.

In step S1900, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in step S1300 to the register of the sub CPU 120a.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
Next, command analysis processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing in the effect control section 120m.

The sub CPU 120a refers to the reception buffer in step S1401 to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1410, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 120a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command, it shifts the process to step S1411, and if it determines that it is not a customer waiting state designation command, it shifts the process to step S1420.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 120a performs a customer waiting effect preparation process. In the customer waiting effect preparation process, the sub CPU 120a sets the customer waiting effect standby flag in the customer waiting effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and sets the waiting time until the customer waiting effect is started (customer waiting effect standby time: for example, 30 seconds) is set in the customer waiting effect timer counter. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting effect control process of step S1600, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect waiting time set in the customer waiting effect timer counter has passed, and determines that the customer waiting effect waiting time has passed. Then, the customer waiting effect standby flag is cleared, the customer waiting effect execution flag is set, and the customer waiting effect command indicating the effect information of the customer waiting effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and the customer waiting effect is repeatedly executed for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds). The execution of the customer waiting effect and the standby are terminated when the game state designation command, the effect pattern designation command, the variation pattern designation command, etc. are transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1420 whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step S1421, and if it is not a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step S1430.

In step S1421, the sub CPU 120a performs pending storage update processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, the number of reserved memories is analyzed from the received special symbol memory designation command, and processing such as setting the analyzed reserved memory number to the reserved memory number counter of the sub-RAM 120c is performed.

In step S1430, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting entry winning designation command. If it is the starting opening winning designation command, the process is moved to step S1431, and if it is not the starting opening winning designation command, the process is moved to step S1440.

The sub CPU 120a performs icon change effect determination processing in step S1431. Specifically, based on the content of the received start-up winning designation command, processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the change scenario is performed. The details of this icon change effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1432.

As will be described in detail later, the icon change scenario determination process includes the final icon display mode determination process for determining the final display mode of the icon and the change scenario determination process for determining the scenario for changing the color of the icon. done.

Here, the “icon change effect” is a effect of changing the display mode (for example, the mode of the icon color) of an icon (suspended icon, variable icon) displayed on the image display device 31 (effect display area 70). .

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and may be capable of executing an effect other than changing the icon color as the icon change effect. For example, as an icon change effect, the icon image may be changed from an image showing a certain motif to an image showing another motif (for example, as an icon change effect, an icon image showing a snowman may be changed to another character or SP). such as changing to an icon image showing the development of

The icon change effect includes a "suspended icon change effect" in which the color of the pending icon is changed, and a "variable icon change effect" in which the color of the variable icon is changed. The icon change effect is performed as one of the look-ahead effects described later. As will be described in detail later, the pending icon change effect is performed only at the time of icon shift (execution timing is limited), whereas the variable icon change effect It is performed with timing (the timing is not limited).

It should be noted that the "read-ahead effect" is an effect performed over one or a plurality of variable effects. By the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest the possibility that a big winning game will be executed and the effect (such as SP reach) that will be performed in the future.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect, an icon appearance effect, which will be described later, a winning flash effect, etc., can be executed as the look-ahead effect.

The sub CPU 120a performs icon appearance effect determination processing in step S1432. Specifically, based on the content of the received start-up winning designation command, processing for determining the appearance mode of the pending icon (any of normal display, delayed display, and re-display) is performed. The details of this icon appearance effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

The sub CPU 120a performs winning flash effect determination processing in step S1433. Specifically, based on the content of the received start-up winning designation command, processing for determining a winning flash effect, which will be described later, is performed. The details of this winning flash effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step S1440, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect design designation command. If it is a production design designation command, the process goes to step S1441, and if it is not a production design designation command, the process goes to step S1450.

In step S1441, the sub CPU 120a performs basic symbol data determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the received performance design designation command, the presence or absence of a big win, basic pattern data (first to fifth big win pattern data, losing pattern data) that can identify the type of a big win. process.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1450 whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If it is a variation pattern specification command, the process moves to step S1451, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command, the process moves to step S1460.

In step S1451, the sub CPU 120a performs variation effect pattern determination processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the received variable pattern designation command, a variable performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variable performance to be executed using various production devices, is determined, and the determined variable performance pattern is performed. A process of setting the variation effect pattern command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the variable effect pattern command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed. The details of this variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1452, the sub CPU 120a performs action determination processing at the start of fluctuation. Specifically, based on the content of the variation effect pattern determined in the processing of step S1451, processing for determining whether or not to perform a variation start time action, which will be described later, is performed. The details of this action determination process at the start of fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 .

In step S1453, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialog announcement determination process. Specifically, based on the content of the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S1451, a process for determining whether or not to perform a dialog announcement, which will be described later, is performed. The details of this dialogue advance notice determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 .

The sub CPU 120a performs timer effect determination processing in step S1454. Specifically, based on the content of the variable effect pattern determined in the process of step S1451, processing for determining whether or not to perform a timer effect, which will be described later, is performed. The details of this timer effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 120a performs stock effect determination processing in step S1455. Specifically, based on the content of the variable effect pattern determined in the process of step S1451, a process for determining whether or not to perform a stock effect, which will be described later, is performed. The details of this stock effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 120a performs cut-in determination processing in step S1456. Specifically, a process for determining a cut-in display mode, which will be described later, is performed based on the content of the variable effect pattern determined in the process of step S1451. The details of this cut-in determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1460, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the pattern confirmation command. If it is a design confirmation command, the process goes to step S1461, and if it is not a design confirmation command, the process goes to step S1470.

In step S1461, the sub CPU 120a performs effect symbol stop processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, in order to stop and display the effect pattern 38, a process of setting a stop designation command for stopping and displaying the effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the stop designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for stopping and displaying the variable effect is performed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1470 whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process goes to step S1471, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process goes to step S1480.

In step S1471, the sub CPU 120a performs game state setting processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, a process of specifying the current game state by referring to the received game state designation command and setting data indicating the specified game state in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c is performed.

Sub CPU 120a determines in step S1480 whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. If it is an opening specifying command, the process moves to step S1481, and if it is not an opening specifying command, the process moves to step S1490.

In step S1481, the sub CPU 120a performs opening effect pattern determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the opening designation command, the effect pattern of the opening effect to be performed at the start of the jackpot game is determined, and the processing of setting the opening effect designation command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. conduct. As a result, the opening effect designation command is transmitted to the image control section 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

In step S1490, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If it is a round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1491, and if there is no round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1500.

In step S1491, the sub CPU 120a performs round effect pattern determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the round designating command, the effect pattern of the round effect performed during the round game is determined, and the process of setting the round effect designating command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. . As a result, the round effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the process for executing the round effect is performed.

In step S1500, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If it is an ending specifying command, the process moves to step S1501, and if it is not an ending specifying command, this command analysis process ends.

In step S1501, the sub CPU 120a performs ending effect pattern determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the ending designation command, the effect pattern of the ending effect to be performed at the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the processing of setting the ending designation command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. . As a result, the ending effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

In step S1510, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error system designation command. If the command is an error system specification command, the process moves to step S1511, and if it is not an error system specification command, the current command analysis process is terminated.

The "error system designation command" is a command indicating that an error has been detected. It includes a door open start designation command, a switch unconnected error start designation command, and a full pan error start designation command.

The sub CPU 120a performs error notification start processing in step S1511. Specifically, when an error command such as a RAM clear command, a power recovery command, a prize frequency abnormality error designation command, etc. is stored in the reception buffer, a process for starting an error notification corresponding to the error command etc. The details of this error notification start process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

In step S1520, the sub CPU 120a performs error notification end determination processing. Specifically, it determines whether or not an error notification such as a RAM clear notification, power recovery notification, or prize frequency abnormality error notification is being executed, or whether or not a command to end the error notification has been received. . The details of this error notification end determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

(Icon change effect determination process)
Next, the icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 37, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icons (the variable icon and the suspended icon) are a white icon displayed in white as a normal icon (as a default icon), Icons ("special icons" to be described later) that are displayed in forms other than white icons, such as white blinking icons and blue icons, can be displayed.

"Icon change effect" means the form of the icon that is first displayed at the time of winning, the timing of delayed display described later, and the timing of re-display described later (hereinafter, may be described as "initial mode"). It is an effect that changes the display mode of the icon in a mode different from that of the Taking one example, the icon change effect is a effect of changing the display mode of an icon displayed as a white icon in the initial mode to a blue icon or the like. In the following description, the icon change effect of the variable icon may be described as "the variable icon change effect", and the icon change effect of the suspended icon may be described as the "suspended icon change effect".

Further, the "non-change scenario" described below is a scenario in which the display color of the icon does not change from the mode displayed in the initial mode (the display color of the initial mode) to the final display mode.

A “change scenario” is a scenario in which the display mode of an icon is changed at least once from the mode displayed in the initial mode (the display color of the initial mode) to the final display mode. From another point of view, when the "change scenario" is selected, at least one icon change effect is performed.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received start winning designation command in step S1431-1. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the received start-up winning designation command, and grasps the winning/losing of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the effect content (planned variation pattern).

In step S1431-2, the sub CPU 120a acquires the icon display mode determination random number for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31, and in step S1431-3, the final display mode of the icon. is selected from the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 38). The details of this final icon display mode determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

Sub CPU 120a determines the final display mode of the icon in step S1431-4. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the final icon display mode determination table, and selects one of a plurality of final icon display modes based on the starting point winning designation command and the random number value for determining the icon display mode. Determines the final display mode of each icon.

In step S1431-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the special icon. If the final icon display mode is the special icon, the process moves to step S1431-6, and if the final icon display mode is not the special icon, the process moves to step S1431-11.

In step S1431-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the blinking white icon. If the final icon display mode is the blinking white icon, the process proceeds to step S1431-11, and if the final icon display mode is not the blinking white icon, the process proceeds to step S1431-7.

Note that, in the present embodiment, when the final display mode of the icon is the "white blinking icon", the icon is displayed as the white blinking icon from the initial mode. Therefore, when the final icon display mode is the white blinking icon, the icon change effect is not executed (the effect of changing the icon displayed as the white icon to the white blinking icon is not performed). In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention may change the white icon to a blinking white icon.

In step S1431-7, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is determined that the icon change effect is executable, the process moves to step S1431-8, and if it is determined that the icon change effect is not executable, the process moves to step S1431-11.

In determining whether or not the icon change effect is executable, it is determined that the effect mode in which the execution of the icon change effect is restricted, that the jackpot game is not being executed, or that the icon change effect is not being executed. is determined to be an executable period. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided.

In step S1431-8, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not all of the prejudgment results of the pending storage corresponding to the previously received start winning designation command, that is, the preceding pending, are equal to or less than the normal reach. If all are equal to or less than the normal reach, the process proceeds to step S1431-9, and if none is equal to or less than the normal reach, the process is moved to step S1431-11.

It should be noted that normal reach or less means normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, and normal reach. That is, in this step S1431-8, it is determined whether or not all the preliminary determination results of the preceding suspension are normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach.

In step S1431-9, the sub CPU 120a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 39) for determining the scenario of the icon change effect. Details of this change scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1431-10, the sub CPU 120a determines a change scenario, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c, and shifts the process to step S1431-12. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the change scenario determination table, and based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize designation command, and the selection rate, a plurality of One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios, set in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub-RAM 120c, and the process proceeds to step S1431-12.

In step S1431-11, the sub CPU 120a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c, and shifts the process to step S1431-12.

In step S1431-12, the sub CPU 120a identifies the initial display mode when the icon is first displayed on the image display device 31 from the determined changed scenario or non-changed scenario, and selects the icon according to the initial display mode. The initial display mode command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon initial display mode command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon initial display mode command is displayed on the image display device 31, or a predetermined sound effect is displayed. It will be output.

Incidentally, in the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, when all the preliminary determination results of the preceding hold are equal to or less than the normal reach, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the variable icon change effect) is executed. Alternatively, the icon change performance may be executed when the preliminary determination result of the preceding suspension is not to perform the ready-to-win performance, and the icon change performance may not be executed when the ready-to-win performance is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the pre-determination result of pre-holding includes the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but in that case, the pre-determination result of pre-hold The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) in the case where the effect is not included than in the case where the ready-to-win effect is included.

(Icon display mode)
FIG. 37 shows an icon display mode displayed on the image display device 31. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 37, the gaming machine 1 suggests the degree of expectation for a big win by the icon display mode. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of white icon<blinking white icon<blue icon<green icon<purple icon<red icon<zebra icon.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an image imitating a snowman is displayed as the pending icon or the variable icon. In addition, the color of the snowman's hat is changed as the icon changes from a white icon to an icon with a high degree of expectation for a big win (blue icon, green icon, etc.). For example, a snowman with a white hat is displayed as a white icon, a snowman with a blue hat is displayed as a blue icon, and a snowman with a zebra pattern hat is displayed as a zebra icon.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the lighting mode of the navel lamp 34c may be changed according to the display color of the icon. For example, when all the icons including the pending icon and the variable icon are displayed as white icons, the navel lamp 34c does not emit light. When the blue icon is displayed, the navel lamp 34c emits blue light, and when the green icon is displayed, the navel lamp 34c emits green light, and the red icon and the zebra icon are displayed. In some cases, the heso lamp 34c may be configured to emit red light.

Note that the navel lamp 34c may emit light in a manner different from the display color of the icon. For example, as an effect when the game ball Q wins the first start hole 14 (for example, a winning flash effect to be described later), the first pending icon is displayed with a blue icon, and the navel lamp 34c is illuminated with a red icon color. and the emission color of the heso lamp 34c may contradict each other.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is designed so that other decorative lighting devices 34 (for example, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, or the decorative lighting device provided on the decorative member 33a) correspond to the change of the icon color. etc.).

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode. The final icon display mode determination table includes the types of start-up winning designation commands, the contents of variation patterns (scheduled variation patterns) corresponding to the start-up winning designation commands, the distribution ratio (%) for each icon final display mode, and The determined icon final display mode is associated.

As shown in FIG. 37, the final icon display mode includes a white icon that is displayed in white as a normal icon, a white flashing icon that is displayed in a mode where the white icon is blinking, a blue icon that is displayed in blue, A green icon displayed in green, a purple icon displayed in purple, a red icon displayed in red, and a zebra icon displayed in zebra pattern (color) are set. Also, as described above, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of (white icon <) white flashing icon <blue icon <green icon <purple icon <red icon <zebra icon.

In the following description, a white icon displayed in white as a normal icon may be described as a "normal icon". Also, an icon displayed in a display mode other than the normal icon may be described as a "special icon". In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “white icon” is displayed as the normal icon, and the “white blinking icon”, “blue icon”, “green icon”, “purple icon”, “red icon”, and “zebra icon” are displayed. ” is displayed as a special icon.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a mode (initial mode) in which the icon is displayed first after the game ball wins the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15, the icon is specially displayed. May appear as an icon. For example, in change scenario 10 of FIG. 39, the icon is displayed as a blue icon in the initial mode.

A first feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the effect content. The starting winning prize information (starting opening winning prize designation command) includes information such as jackpot wins and losses, jackpot types, and effect contents (ready-to-win effects, etc., pseudo consecutive times).

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the specific starting winning information indicating that the effect content is SP reach or SPSP reach, it indicates that the effect content is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not become reach. The special icon is selected at a higher rate than in the case of normal startup prize information.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario. In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start winning designation command, the allocation ratio (%) for each scenario, and the type of change scenario to be determined are associated. For reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode for the changes are described.

Here, the "preliminary variation" is the variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command. That is, "the variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed) and changes during the change (the change icon change effect is executed). ) Scenario (for example, scenario 05, etc.) and the display mode of the icon change during the execution of the prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during the execution of the variation (the variation icon change Scenarios (for example, scenario 06, etc.) where effects are not executed, and icon display modes change during the execution of prior variation and during the execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and the variable icon change effect (executed) scenario (for example, scenario 18, etc.) is set.

As an example of the change scenario, the case where the change scenario 49 is selected in response to the reception of the starting opening winning designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14 will be described.

In the change scenario 49, in the initial mode (in the case of the normal display, which will be described later, when a game ball is won into the first starting port 14), the number of reservations in the first reservation icon display area 72a of the image display device 31 " 4” is displayed as a pending icon. Then, the white icon is maintained until the preliminary change four times before the change being executed at the time the white icon is displayed is completed. After that, when the advance change before 3 changes is started, the white icon moves to the position corresponding to the number of reservations "3", the reservation icon change effect is executed, and the white icon changes to the blue icon. Then, when the preliminary change two changes before is started, the blue icon moves to a position corresponding to the number of reservations "2", and the blue icon is maintained until the preliminary change two changes before ends. After that, when the advance variation one variation before is started, the blue icon moves to the position corresponding to the number of suspension "1", and the suspension icon change effect is executed to change the blue icon to the green icon. When the variation starts, the green icon becomes the variation icon, the variation icon change effect is executed, the green icon changes to the red icon at a predetermined timing, and then the zebra icon changes to the zebra icon at a predetermined timing. do.

In addition, in this embodiment, when changing the color of the pending icon in advance change, and when changing the color of the change icon in the change, the display mode is changed by one step (for example, blue → green ) or change in two or more stages (for example, from purple to zebra), but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode may be changed step by step for both or one of the color change of the pending icon (icon color change in prior variation) and the color change of the variation icon (icon color change in the variation). Alternatively, the display mode is changed by one step in the color change of the pending icon (color change in the previous change), and the display mode is changed in one step or two or more steps in the color change of the change icon (icon color change in the change). It may be made to

A first feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that a scenario in which the icon display state changes during execution of the change is selected at a higher rate than a scenario in which the icon display state changes in the initial state. It has become so. By doing so, the expectation of whether or not the icon display mode will change (whether the icon change effect is executed) can be maintained until the change, and the interest in the game can be improved. Become.

A second feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that the icon display mode changes over a plurality of stages (green, purple, red, and zebra icons are determined as the final icon display mode). , it is set so that the number of stages in which the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation is likely to be greater than the number of stages in which the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display mode of the icon changes over a plurality of stages in the change, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (may be a ready-to-reach other than the normal reach) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed or not is a determination element. A scenario may be determined. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon Appearance Effect Decision Processing)
Next, the icon appearance effect determination processing of the effect control unit 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing icon appearance effect determination processing in the effect control unit 120m.

Note that the “icon appearance effect” is an effect in which a pending icon appears at a predetermined timing. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, "normal display", "delayed display", and "re-display" can be executed as icon appearance effects.

In the normal display, a pending icon appears and is displayed at the timing when the game ball enters the starting hole (at the time of winning).

In the delayed display, a pending icon appears and is displayed at a timing (timing TMa2) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of winning (in this embodiment, two seconds after the time of winning).

In the redisplay, after the pending icon appears and is displayed at the time of winning, the displayed pending icon disappears, and then at the timing (timing TMa2, 2 seconds after the winning) after a predetermined time has passed since the time of winning. The pending icon reappears and is displayed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of patterns of timings for making the pending icon appear in the icon appearance effect are provided. More specifically, in the gaming machine 1, when the pending icon appears at the time of winning (normal display), when the pending icon appears at a timing later than the time of winning (delayed display), and when the pending icon appears at the time of winning. There is a case where the pending icon is made to appear again (re-display) at a timing after the time of winning the prize.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 gives the player a sense of discomfort when the delayed display or redisplay is performed, and the big hit determination result related to the delayed display or redisplayed hold icon and the effect to be performed in the future. You can raise your expectations.

In this specification, the timing at which the pending icon is displayed in the normal display may be described as "at the time of winning". 14 or the second starting hole 15) and the winning is detected by the starting hole detection switch. Needless to say. That is, "at the time of winning a prize" is not a timing that completely coincides with the timing of winning a prize at the starting port, but a command transmission time from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 120m, and a pending icon. is the timing after the elapse of the time from the execution of the processing to the start of drawing, and means the timing at which the player feels that "it is almost the same timing as the winning at the start opening".

In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a configuration in which the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is preferentially subtracted from the first special symbol reserved number (U1). From the viewpoint of prevention, only the icon appearance performance corresponding to the second special symbol suspension is executed without executing the icon appearance performance corresponding to the first special symbol suspension in the time saving game state. In the normal game state, since the second special symbol reservation is unlikely to occur, only the icon appearance effect corresponding to the first special symbol reservation may be executed, or the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation may be executed. It is also possible to execute an icon appearance effect corresponding to both.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received start winning designation command in step S1432-1. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the received starting opening winning designation command, the type of starting opening that has won, the current game state, the winning or losing of the jackpot, the type of jackpot, the effect content (planned) to grasp the fluctuation pattern).

In step S1432-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not it is fluctuating. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of determining whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If it is fluctuating, the process moves to step S1432-4, and if it is not fluctuating, the process moves to step S1432-3. In the present embodiment, delay display or redisplay is not determined when the variable icon is not in progress (when the variable icon does not exist), but the variable icon may be displayed with delay or redisplay. . For example, when there is a prize at the starting gate when the game is not changing (during a customer waiting state, etc.), the display may be delayed or redisplayed when the changing icon appears.

In step S1432-3, sub CPU 120a determines normal display as the icon appearance mode.

In step S1432-4, the sub CPU 120a acquires the icon appearance effect determination random value for determining the appearance mode of the pending icon (any of normal display, delayed display, and re-display), An icon appearance effect determination table (see FIG. 41) is selected according to the type and whether it is a low probability game state or a high probability game state. The details of this icon appearance effect determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

Sub CPU 120a determines the icon appearance mode in step S1432-5. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the icon appearance effect determination table, and, based on the start opening prize designation command and the icon appearance effect determination random number value, sets the icon appearance mode to "normal display," Either "delay display" or "redisplay" is determined.

In step S1432-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined icon appearance mode (any of normal display, delayed display, and redisplay) in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and shifts the process to step S1432-7. As a result, the icon appearance mode designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the like, and processing for executing the icon appearance effect is performed.

In step S1432-7, sub CPU 120a sets an icon non-appearance flag in a predetermined backup area provided in sub RAM 120c. When this process ends, the current icon appearance effect determination process ends. Note that the icon non-appearance flag is cleared in the icon appearance completion determination process (step S1610) of the timer interrupt process when the appearance of the pending icon (drawing process for causing the pending icon to appear) is completed.

(Icon appearance effect determination table)
Figure 41 (a) is an icon for the first special symbol display device that is referred to during the low probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state when determining the icon appearance effect that is performed with the winning of the first start port 14 as a trigger Appearance effect determination table (during low probability non-time-saving game state), FIG. The icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device to be referred to (low probability time saving game state), FIG. It is an icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device that is referred to during the high probability game state and the time saving game state (at the time of the high probability time saving game state).

In addition, in the following description, the icon appearance effect determination table for the first special symbol display device of FIG. The icon appearance effect determination table (during the low probability time saving game state) and the icon appearance effect determination table (during the high probability time saving game state) for the second special symbol display device in FIG. Appearance effect determination table” may be described for explanation.

As shown in FIG. 41, each icon appearance effect determination table includes a special symbol display device, a jackpot determination result, a starting entry winning designation command, a variation pattern (planned fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the starting entry winning designation command, and a jackpot determination. The result is associated with the distribution ratio (%) of the determined icon appearance mode, and the effect content for each variable effect pattern is described as a reference.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon appearance effect determination table for the first special symbol display device, which is referred to in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 41 (a)), In the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device and referred to in the low probability time saving game state (see FIG. 41 (b)) and the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device What is referred to in the high probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 41(c)) is provided.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the normal game state (during the low probability non-time saving game state) and the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the low probability time saving game state and an icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the high-probability time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability that delay display or re-display is determined in the icon appearance effect depends on the type of the starting port and whether it is in a low-probability game state or a high-probability game state. is different. Specifically, in these icon appearance effect determination tables, the distribution ratio of normal display, delayed display, and re-display differs depending on the degree of expectation for a big win and whether it develops into an SP reach.

In other words, in the icon appearance effect of the present embodiment, under different conditions (whether it is a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, or whether it is a low-probability gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) So, it is configured that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the execution pattern (such as whether it is normal display or delayed display).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(a), in the icon appearance effect (icon appearance effect in the normal game state) triggered by winning the first start port 14, normal variation or shortened variation is executed. or when SP reach or SPSP reach is executed (when a performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is performed) than when normal reach is executed. ”) is determined, and when the same SP reach is performed, there is a higher probability that the delay display etc. will be determined in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. . For example, there is a higher probability that the delay display, etc. will be determined when SP reach is performed than when normal reach is performed, and when SP reach is performed, the delay display etc. more likely to be decided.

According to the above distribution ratio, in the icon appearance effect that is performed during the normal game state (during the low probability non-time-saving game state), the expectation of the jackpot is high in the order of normal display <delayed display <re-display, SP reach or more ( SP Reach, SPSP Reach, Resurrection, Full Rotation Reach), normal display < delay display = redisplay. More specifically, in the icon appearance effect determination table for the first special symbol display device referred to during the normal game state of FIG. If it is equal to or less than normal reach, it is not determined. Therefore, when delayed display or re-display occurs, the development to SP reach or higher is confirmed (delayed and re-displayed SP reach or higher is confirmed = 100%).

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can give the player a sense of incongruity and sharpness to the game, and can increase expectations for the future development of SP reach and the like and a big win.

Here, to explain the event related to the icon appearance effect during the normal game state from the player's point of view, if the pending icon appears at the time of winning, the player's expectation for the big win is more This means that the player's sense of expectation for the big win is greater when it appears after a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, in the case where re-display is performed, when explaining in chronological order from the player's point of view for each appearance of a pending icon for one winning, it is more likely than "appearance of a pending icon at the time of winning" to "a predetermined time from the time of winning". Appearance of pending icon later" can be said to have greater expectations for a big win (Expectation for a big win for the appearance of a pending icon at the time of winning < Expectation for a big win for the appearance of a pending icon after a predetermined time from the time of winning) . In addition, when the event of re-display is viewed in chronological order from the player's point of view, when the event "first appearance of the reserved icon (appearance of the reserved icon at the time of winning)" is encountered It is said that the player's expectation for a jackpot when encountering the event of "the second appearance of the reserved icon (appearance of the reserved icon after a predetermined time)" is higher than the player's expectation for the jackpot. It will be.

From another point of view, in the icon appearance effect during the normal game state, even if the pending icon appears at the time of winning, the player cannot determine whether or not the pending icon will reappear at that time (usually It cannot be determined whether it is display or redisplay). Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it can be said that there is provided a period of time during which the player expects that the pending icon will once disappear and reappear.

Thus, according to the icon appearance effect determination table for the first special symbol display device of FIG. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by increasing the expectation for the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the icon appearance effect performed in the low probability gaming state triggered by the winning of the second start port 15 (icon appearance effect performed in the low probability time-saving game state), normal fluctuation or Probability that delay display etc. will be determined when shortening variation is executed or when SP reach or SP reach is executed (when performance with high expectation of big hit is performed) than when normal reach is executed is high, there is no difference in the probability that the delayed display or the like is determined when the same SP reach is performed and the case of losing and the case of a big win are compared. For example, when the SP reach is performed than when the normal reach is performed, the probability that the delay display etc. is decided is higher, whereas when the SP reach is performed, the delay display is made in the case of a loss and in the case of a big hit. There is no difference in the probabilities that etc. are determined.

According to the above distribution ratio, in the icon appearance effect that is performed during the low-probability time-saving game state, the expectation of the jackpot is high in the order of normal display <delayed display = redisplay, and more than SP reach (SP reach, SPSP reach, revival , full rotation reach), normal display < delay display = re-display. More specifically, in the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device referred to during the low-probability time-saving gaming state of FIG. If it is less than normal reach, it will not be decided. Therefore, when delayed display or re-display occurs, the development to SP reach or higher is confirmed (delayed and re-displayed SP reach or higher is confirmed = 100%).

Here, each SP reach and SPSP reach in this embodiment has one jackpot expectation for each reach. For example, SP reach 1 has a jackpot expectation of 1%, and SPSP reach 3 has a jackpot expectation of 33%. These ready-to-win expectations for each of the ready-to-win productions are calculated by a predetermined arithmetic expression in consideration of the big-hit probability, the ratio of special symbol determination, the ratio of ready-to-win determination, the selection ratio of variation patterns, and the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), for the icon appearance effect, the distribution of which execution pattern is determined among the three types of execution patterns (normal display, delayed display, re-display) is as follows. It differs depending on whether it is a loss or a big hit, and the content of the determined variable performance. That is, as described above, the icon appearance effect also has one big win expectation for each execution pattern. The expected degree of jackpot for each of these execution patterns is calculated by a predetermined arithmetic expression, taking into account the probability of jackpot, the ratio of special pattern determination, the ratio of reach determination, the selection ratio of variation patterns, and the distribution ratio of icon appearance effects. .

As described above, one expected jackpot is set for each ready-to-win effect, and one expected jackpot is set for each execution pattern of the icon appearance effect. It can be said that the execution pattern is a production that directly suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. However, the time series of the series of variable effects is a flow in which the icon appearance effect is performed first, and then the reach effect is executed after receiving the icon appearance effect. Since the expected jackpot of the execution pattern is calculated by adding the expected jackpot of each reach production, the icon appearance production is a reach development suggestion as to which reach production will develop. From the side, it can be said that it is a production that indirectly suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit.

From this aspect, the gaming machine 1 gives the player a sense of incompatibility while giving the game a sharpness, and at the same time, when the player guesses whether or not a big win has been awarded, the gaming machine 1 uses more advanced guessing elements (guessing factors). information). As a result, the gaming machine 1 can raise expectations for the future development of the SP reach and the like, and further improve the amusement of the game.

In the following description, a certain effect (for example, an icon appearance effect, a winning flash effect, a look-ahead effect such as an icon change effect, an action at the start of a change, a dialogue notice, a simulated continuous effect, etc.) Depending on whether or not it is executed (execution or not) and the execution pattern (normal display or delayed display, etc.), the degree of jackpot expectation does not directly differ, but after that, the jackpot expectation such as SP reach If you want to describe features such as the possibility that other effects with a high level of performance will be performed, indirectly depending on whether or not it is executed and the execution pattern, simply state that the expectation of the jackpot differs indirectly. may be explained as

In addition, according to the distribution ratio of FIG. 41 (c), in the icon appearance effect performed during the high probability time-saving game state, the expectation of the jackpot is high in the order of normal display = delay display <re-display, SP reach or more (SP Reach, SPSP Reach, Resurrection, Full Rotation Reach) are normally displayed <delayed display <re-displayed.

That is, in the icon appearance effect performed during the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the degree of expectation for the big hit is the same between the normal display and the delayed display.

As a result, the game machine 1 can give a sharpness to the game without causing the player to raise and lower the tension unnecessarily while giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Here, in the icon appearance effect of the gaming machine of the present invention, there may be no difference in the degree of expectation for big wins depending on the execution pattern (the degree of expectation for big wins is the same). Specifically, as in the modified example of the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device referred to during the high probability time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 41 (d), in the high probability time-saving gaming state, Regardless of whether normal display, delayed display, or re-display is determined, there may be no difference in the degree of expectation for a big win (normal display=delayed display=re-display).

The modification shown in FIG. 41(d) will be described in more detail. According to the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device of FIG. is performed, there is no difference in the expectation of the jackpot.

To explain this phenomenon in chronological order from the player's point of view, if the pending icon appears at the time of winning, the player's expectation for the big win in response to that event, and the pending icon appears after a predetermined time from the time of winning. In this case, there is no difference from the player's expectation for the big win for that event. In other words, regardless of the timing at which the pending icon appears (whether it is at the time of winning or after a predetermined time from the time of winning), there is no difference in the degree of expectation for a big win estimated by the player at that time.

Furthermore, in the case of re-displaying, each appearance of the pending icon for one winning will be explained in chronological order from the player's point of view. It can be said that there is no difference in the player's expectations for the jackpot at each point in time between the "appearance of the pending icon" and the player's expectations for the jackpot Expectations for a big hit with the appearance of icons). In addition, when the event of re-display is viewed in chronological order from the player's point of view, when the event "first appearance of the reserved icon (appearance of the reserved icon at the time of winning)" is encountered There is no difference between the player's expected jackpot and the player's expected jackpot when encountering the event "the second appearance of the reserved icon (appearance of the reserved icon after a predetermined time)". It turns out that.

Thus, according to the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device of FIG. , tempo and sharpness can be given to the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first appearance timing of the pending icon when delayed display is performed and the second appearance timing of the pending icon when re-display is performed are set to 2 seconds from the time of winning. Although an example in which it is performed later is shown, this timing may be changed according to the conditions under which the icon appearance effect is performed. For example, in the normal gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state), the pending icon appears 2 seconds after winning in the delayed display or re-display, while in the high-probability short-time gaming state, in the delayed display or re-display, from the time of winning The pending icon may appear at a later timing, such as after 5 seconds, or at an earlier timing.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by giving stronger contrast to the game played under different conditions.

(Prize winning flash effect determination process)
Next, the winning flash effect determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing winning flash effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

The "winning flash effect" is a effect that is performed when a prize is awarded to the starting gate (the first starting gate 14 or the second starting gate 15). The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment outputs a sound effect and causes the navel lamp 34c to emit light in a predetermined manner at the time of winning as a winning flash effect.

More specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a winning flash effect, the navel lamp 34c emits white light and a specific sound A (in the present embodiment, a sound effect of "picking") is output in a "weak pattern." and a "strong pattern" that causes the navel lamp 34c to emit red light and outputs a specific sound B (in this embodiment, a sound effect of "blinking"). Note that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in the order of no winning flash effect <with winning flash effect (weak pattern)<with winning flash effect (strong pattern).

In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a configuration in which the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is preferentially subtracted from the first special symbol reserved number (U1). From the viewpoint of prevention, in the time-saving game state, only the winning flush performance corresponding to the second special symbol reservation is executed without executing the winning flush performance corresponding to the first special symbol reservation. In the normal game state, since the second special symbol reservation is less likely to occur, only the winning flush effect corresponding to the first special symbol reservation may be executed, or the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation may be executed. It is also possible to execute a winning flash effect corresponding to both.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received start winning designation command in step S1433-1. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the received start-up winning designation command, and grasps the winning/losing of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the effect content (planned variation pattern).

In step S1433-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the icon appearance mode is "delay display" or "re-display". Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the appearance mode of the icon determined in the icon appearance effect determination process is either “delayed display” or “re-display”. If the icon appearance mode is not "delayed display" or "redisplay", the process is moved to step S1433-3.If the icon appearance mode is "delayed display" or "redisplayed", the winning flash Terminate the effect determination process.

In the present embodiment, the winning flash effect is not performed when delayed display or re-display is determined in the icon appearance effect, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. That is, when it is decided to perform the delayed display or re-display in the icon appearance effect, the winning flash effect may be performed. In that case, for example, when the icon is displayed with a delay or when it is displayed again, the winning flash effect is performed.

In step S1433-3, the sub CPU 120a acquires a winning flash effect determination random value for determining a winning flash effect, and determines the presence or absence of a winning flash effect and the execution pattern of the winning flash effect determination table (Fig. 43). reference). The details of this winning flash effect determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1433-4 whether or not execution of the winning flash effect has been determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not execution of either the “weak pattern” or the “strong pattern” of the winning flash effect has been determined in the process of step 1433-3. If it is decided to execute the winning flash effect, the process moves to step S1433-5. When execution of the winning flash effect is not determined, the current winning flash effect determination processing is terminated.

In step S1433-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a winning flash effect designating command indicating the determined winning flash effect (either of the weak pattern and the strong pattern) to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and sets the winning flash effect specifying command to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. End decision processing. As a result, the winning flash effect designation command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 170 and the like, and processing for executing the winning flash effect is performed.

(Prize winning flash effect determination table)
FIG. 43 shows a winning flash effect determination table referred to when determining the presence or absence of a winning flash effect and the execution pattern.

As shown in FIG. 43, the winning flash effect determination table contains the results of the jackpot determination, the starting entry winning designation command, the contents of the variation pattern (planned variation pattern) corresponding to the starting entry winning designation command, the jackpot determination result, and the winning flash effect. is associated with the distribution ratio (%) of the execution pattern of .

As shown in FIG. 43, in the present embodiment, when SP reach, SPSP reach, etc. are executed (when an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is performed), the probability of winning flash effect being determined is higher and the same. When the SP reach or the like is performed, the probability of determining the winning flash effect is higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. For example, when SP reach is performed, the probability of determining a winning flash effect is higher than when normal reach is performed, and when SP reach is performed, winning flash is more likely to be determined than when a big hit is lost. The probability that the production will be decided is high.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation for a big win increases in the order of no winning flash effect <with winning flash effect (weak pattern)<with winning flash effect (strong pattern), and development to SP reach etc. is more likely to

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can enhance expectations for future expansion to SP reach and the like and a big win in the look-ahead effect.

(Variation effect pattern determination process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing a variable effect pattern determination process in the effect control section 120m.

The sub CPU 120a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step S1451-1, and selects the variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) in step S1451-2.

In step S1451-3, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variable effect pattern determination table, and determines one variable effect pattern from among a plurality of variable effect patterns based on the variable pattern designation command and the distribution ratio (%). . The details of this variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1451-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the variable effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the process for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation production pattern decision table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table referred to when determining a variable performance pattern. In the variable performance pattern determination table, the variable pattern designation command and the determined variable performance pattern are associated with each other, and the performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is described as a reference.

The variable effect pattern includes the image display device 31 (effect display area 70), the audio output device 32, the board drive device 33, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, the navel lamp 34c, the effect button 35, and the operation lever 36. It is a production mode of a variable production performed using the production device, and the presence or absence of a ready-to-win production, the contents of the ready-to-win production, the contents of pseudo-runs, etc. are defined.

Here, each term described in the effect configuration of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 will be explained.

“Normal fluctuation” means that a normal fluctuation effect in which the ready-to-win state is not formed by the effect pattern 38 is performed.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation effect is performed in which the ready-to-win state is not formed by the effect pattern 38, which is shorter than the normal variation effect.
"Pseudo-run failure" indicates that the pseudo-run will not be executed in the end, even though a stimulating effect is executed to determine whether or not the pseudo-run will be executed.
"Normal reach" indicates that a normal reach effect in which a reach state is formed by the effect pattern 38 is performed.

"Normal pseudo" (N pseudo) indicates that the two performance symbols 38 develop into a pseudo run without becoming a reach (in a non-reach state).
"Pseudo after reach" (pseudo after R) indicates that the two performance symbols 38 develop into a pseudo run after becoming a reach.

"SP ready-to-win" indicates that a ready-to-win state is formed by the effect pattern 38, and an SP ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal ready-to-win effect is performed.
"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that a ready-to-win state is formed by the effect pattern 38, and SPSP ready-to-win effect with higher expectation for big hit than SP ready-to-win effect is performed.

"Resurrection" means that an effect is performed in which the effect pattern 38 is temporarily lost from the ready-to-win state, and then a resurrection effect is performed in which the game is reversed and a big win is announced. Incidentally, the resurrection effect is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning the jackpot lottery.
"Full rotation" indicates that a full rotation ready-to-win effect is performed in which all the combinations of a plurality of performance symbols 38 for informing a big hit are complete and the speed fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, the all-rotation ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning the jackpot lottery.

As a reference, FIG. 45 shows the number of pseudo-runs indicating how many times the pseudo-run is performed for each variable effect pattern and the name of the variable effect.

In the following description and drawings, the normal pseudo is described as "N pseudo", and the post-reach pseudo is described as "post-R pseudo" in some cases.

Further, in the following description, the case where one pseudo-run is performed during one variation and the second pseudo-run is not performed may be simply referred to as "pseudo-run 2". Also, the case where the second pseudo-run is performed after the first pseudo-run is performed during one variation may be simply described as "pseudo-run 3 reached".

Further, in the following description, the first pseudo-variation in the case where one or more pseudo-runs are performed during one variation is simply referred to as "pseudo 1-variation", and the second pseudo-variation is simply referred to as " may be described as “pseudo 2 fluctuation”. Also, the third pseudo-variation in the case where two pseudo-runs are performed during one variation is sometimes described simply as "pseudo-three variations".

Here, the details of pseudo-runs and the number of pseudo-runs performed in SP reach 1 to 5, SPSP reach 1 to 3, recovery, and full rotation will be described.

In "SP reach 1", a normal pseudo run is performed as one pseudo run.
In the "SP reach 2", the post-reach pseudo-run is performed as one pseudo-run.
In "SP reach 3", two pseudo-runs are performed. More specifically, normal simulation is performed as the first pseudo-run, and normal simulation is performed as the second pseudo-run.
In "SP reach 4", two pseudo-runs are performed. More specifically, normal simulation is performed as the first pseudo-run, and post-reach simulation is performed as the second pseudo-run.
In "SP reach 5", two pseudo-runs are performed. More specifically, the post-reach simulation is performed as the first pseudo-run, and the post-reach simulation is performed as the second pseudo-run.
In "SPSP reach 1", two pseudo-runs are performed. More specifically, normal simulation is performed as the first pseudo-run, and normal simulation is performed as the second pseudo-run.
In "SPSP Reach 2", two pseudo-runs are performed. More specifically, normal simulation is performed as the first pseudo-run, and post-reach simulation is performed as the second pseudo-run.
In "SPSP Reach 3", two pseudo-runs are performed. More specifically, the post-reach simulation is performed as the first pseudo-run, and the post-reach simulation is performed as the second pseudo-run.
In "resurrection", two pseudo-runs are performed. More specifically, the post-reach simulation is performed as the first pseudo-run, and the post-reach simulation is performed as the second pseudo-run.
In the "full rotation reach", two pseudo-runs are performed. More specifically, the post-reach simulation is performed as the first pseudo-run, and the post-reach simulation is performed as the second pseudo-run.

Here, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, normal reach<SP reach 1 (normal pseudo, pseudo repeat number 1)<SP reach 2 (post-reach pseudo, pseudo repeat number 1)<SP reach 3 (normal pseudo → Normal pseudo, 2 pseudo consecutive times) <SP reach 4 (normal pseudo → pseudo after reach, 2 pseudo consecutive times) <SP reach 5 (pseudo after reach → pseudo after reach, 2 pseudo consecutive times) hit in order Expectations are high (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect are more likely to be determined when the pseudo-run is executed than when the pseudo-run is not executed, and the number of times the pseudo-run is executed is greater. There is a point that the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases as the number increases. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation regarding whether or not the pseudo-run will be executed, or the number of times the pseudo-run will be executed, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 does not have a variable effect pattern in which normal reach is performed, SP reach is performed, and then SP SP reach is performed, but it may be provided.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the number of pseudo-runs is the same, the expectation of a big win is higher when the SP reach is performed than when the SP reach is performed. Specifically, SP reach 3 (normal pseudo → normal pseudo, pseudo consecutive times 2 times) < SP reach 4 (normal pseudo → post-reach pseudo, pseudo consecutive times 2 times) < SP reach 5 (post-reach pseudo → after reach Pseudo, number of pseudo-runs 2 times) <SPSP reach 1 (normal pseudo → normal pseudo, number of pseudo-runs 2) <SPSP reach 2 (normal pseudo-> pseudo after reach, number of pseudo-runs 2) <SPSP reach 3 (after reach The degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of pseudo->pseudo after reaching, pseudo-runs 2 times) (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

(Action determination process at the start of fluctuation)
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the action determination process at the start of variation of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing action determination processing at the start of variation in the effect control section 120m.

Note that the "action at the start of fluctuation" is an effect performed immediately after the start of fluctuation. The action at the time of starting the fluctuation of this embodiment is a production in which the production pattern 38 performs a movement (action) different from normal (when the action at the time of fluctuation starting is not executed) (see FIG. 77).

First, in step S1452-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the determined variation effect pattern, and in step S1452-2, determines whether or not to execute the action at the start of variation using the action determination table at the start of variation (FIG. 47). to decide. Details of the action determination table at the start of fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1452-3 whether or not execution of the action at the time of start of fluctuation has been determined. If the execution of the action at the start of fluctuation is determined, the process proceeds to step S1452-4. The action determination process at the start of this fluctuation ends.

In step S1452-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an action specifying command at the start of fluctuation in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the change start action specifying command is transmitted to the image control unit 150, and the process for executing the change start action is performed.

(Action decision table at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a change start action determination table referred to when deciding whether or not to execute a change start action. The fluctuation start action determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the fluctuation effect pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute the fluctuation start action.

As a feature of the action determination table at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 47, the action at the start of fluctuation is more likely to be determined in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and a fluctuation performance with a low expectation for a big win. The action at the start of variation is more likely to be executed when a variation performance pattern with a higher expectation for a big win is determined than when the pattern is determined.

(Dialogue notice decision processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the speech announcement determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a dialogue announcement determination process in the effect control section 120m.

Note that the "line notice" is an effect in which the image display device 31 displays a line, a character, or the like suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and a sound corresponding to the line is output from the sound output device 32. be.

First, in step S1453-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the determined variable effect pattern, and in step S1453-2, uses the dialogue advance notice execution determination table (see FIG. 49(a)) to decide whether to execute the dialogue advance notice. Decide whether or not The details of this dialogue advance notice execution determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 49(a).

In step S1453-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not execution of the advance notice of the dialogue has been determined. If it is decided to execute the dialogue advance notice, the process proceeds to step S1453-4, and if it is not decided to execute the dialogue advance notice (if it is decided that there is no dialogue notice), the current dialogue advance notice decision processing is executed. exit.

In step S1453-4, the sub CPU 120a determines the display color of the dialogue using the dialogue display color determination table (see FIG. 49(b)). Details of the dialogue display color determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 49(b).

In step S1453-5, the sub CPU 120a determines a dialogue pattern using the dialogue pattern determination table (see FIG. 49(c)). The details of this dialogue pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 49(c).

In step S1453-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a dialogue advance notice designation command corresponding to the determined dialogue display color and dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the speech announcement specifying command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the speech announcement is performed.

(Dialogue notice execution decision table)
FIG. 49(a) is a diagram showing a dialogue advance notice execution determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a dialogue advance notice. The result of the jackpot lottery, the variation performance pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute the speech notice are associated with the speech notice execution determination table.

In the dialogue advance notice execution determination table, "no advance notice" is set in which the dialogue advance notice is not executed, and "with advance notice" is executed.

49(a) is characterized in that, in the case of a big win, it is easier to determine a line notice than in the case of a loss, and a variation effect with a low degree of expectation for a big win. There is a point that the advance notice of lines is more likely to be determined when a variable performance pattern with a higher expectation for a big win is determined than when the pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Serif display color determination table)
FIG. 49(b) is a diagram showing a dialogue display color determination table that is referred to when determining the display color of dialogue in advance notice of dialogue. The dialog display color determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) of the dialog display color.

In the dialog display color determination table, display color allocation is set to indicate in what color the character image of the dialog is to be displayed. Specifically, four types of "white serif", "red serif", "gold serif", and "rainbow serif" are set in the serif display color determination table. It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in the order of white dialogue <red dialogue <gold dialogue <rainbow dialogue, and the rainbow dialogue is an effect that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Dialog pattern determination table)
FIG. 49(c) is a diagram showing a dialogue pattern determination table referred to when determining a dialogue pattern. The speech pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) for each speech pattern.

Four types of speech patterns (speech A, speech B, speech C, and speech D) with different degrees of expectation for a big hit are set as speech patterns, and the expectation of a big hit is set in the order of speech A < speech B < speech C < speech D. degree is high.

As a feature of the dialog pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(c), a dialog pattern with a high jackpot expectation is more likely to be determined when the jackpot lottery result is a big win than when the jackpot lottery result is a loss, and the jackpot expectation is low. When a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined, lines with a high degree of expectation for a big win are more likely to be determined than when a variation performance pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the advance notice of dialogue is performed 2 seconds after the start of fluctuation, regardless of which dialogue display color or dialogue pattern is determined. In other words, the timing at which the line notice occurs is constant regardless of the degree of expectation for the big win. That is, while the timing of occurrence of the advance notice of words is constant, it is performed as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win by means of the words display color and the words pattern.

(Timer effect determination process)
Next, the timer effect determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing timer effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

The “timer effect” is an effect suggesting the occurrence of any of a plurality of events that make players expect that a jackpot game will be executed in the process of executing the variable effect, and the timing of the occurrence of the event. In the timer effect, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of event when it is executed, but the type of event can be determined when the event occurs.

First, in step S1454-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the current variable effect pattern, and in step S1454-2, the effect above the SP reach (one of SP reach, SPSP reach, revival, and full rotation reach ) is executed. If it is SP reach or more, the process moves to step S1454-3, and if it is not SP reach or more, this timer effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1454-3, the sub CPU 120a uses the timer count determination table (see FIG. 51(a)) to determine the number of timer effects (“0 times” to “2 times”) to be executed during the current variable effect. decide. The details of this timer count determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1454-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not execution of the timer effect has been determined (whether or not the timer count is 1 or more). If execution of the timer effect is determined (when the timer count is "1 time" or "2 times"), the process proceeds to step S1454-5, and if execution of the timer effect is not determined (timer If the number of times is "0"), the current timer effect determination process is terminated.

The sub CPU 120a determines the timer type using the timer type determination table (see FIG. 51(b)) in step S1454-5. The details of this timer type determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1454-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined timer count is one. If it is once, the process moves to step S1454-7, and if it is not once (in the case of two times), the process moves to step S1454-9.

In step S1454-7, the sub CPU 120a determines a suggestive event to be suggested by the timer effect using the suggested event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 52(a)). Details of the suggested event determination table for one timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 52(a).

In step S1454-8, the sub CPU 120a sets a timer effect designation command indicating a suggested event and a timer type pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and terminates the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect specifying command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the timer effect is performed.

In step S1454-9, the sub CPU 120a determines suggested events suggested by the first timer effect and the second timer effect using the suggested event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 52(b)). do. The details of the suggested event determination table for two timers will be described later with reference to FIG. 52(b).

In step S1454-10, the sub CPU 120a sets a timer effect specifying command indicating the suggested event and timer type in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the first and second timer effects is performed.

(Timer count determination table)
FIG. 51(a) is a diagram showing a timer count determination table referred to when determining the number of times of the timer effect executed during the variable effect. The timer number determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) for each number of times of the timer effect.

The number of times of the timer effect is "0 times", which means that the timer effect is not executed, "1 time", which means that the timer effect is executed once, and "1 time", which means that the timer effect is executed twice. 2 times” is set.

The first feature of the timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. 51(a) is that the timer effect is more likely to be determined in the case of the big win than in the case of the big win lottery result, and the expectation of the big win is low. The timer effect is more likely to be determined when the ready-to-win effect with high expectation for big win is executed than when the ready-to-win effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51(a), in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times the timer effect is executed tends to increase when the big win lottery result is a big win rather than when the big win lottery result is a loss. there is That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the greater the number of times the timer effect is executed, the higher the expectation of a big win (no timer effect (timer 0)<timer 1 time<timer 2 times). By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of executions of the timer effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of executions of the timer effect increases when a ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed than when a ready-to-win effect with a low degree of expectation for a big win is executed. It's made easy. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Timer type determination table)
FIG. 51(b) is a diagram showing a timer type determination table referred to when determining the type of timer effect (timer type). The timer type determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery results, variable effect patterns, and distribution ratios (%) for each timer type.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), in this embodiment, three types of "short timer", "middle timer", and "long timer" are set as timer types. The timer type indicates that the timer time (the time after the timer image is displayed until the timer time is subtracted to "0") is different, and the timer time is in the order of short timer<middle timer<long timer. getting longer. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in the order of short timer<middle timer<long timer.

The first feature of the timer type determination table shown in FIG. 51(b) is that a timer type with a long timer time is more likely to be determined in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and a big win. A timer type with a long timer time is more likely to be determined when a ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed than when a ready-to-win effect with a low degree of expectation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a timer type with a longer timer time is determined when a ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed than when a ready-to-win effect with a low degree of expectation for a big win is executed. is becoming easier. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win, the easier it is for the long timer to be determined as the timer type. By doing so, the player will have a sense of anticipation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the timer effect is performed a plurality of times (twice in this embodiment), the second timer subtraction time is longer than the first timer subtraction time. (first timer subtraction time < second timer subtraction time). That is, in this embodiment, when the first timer effect is the middle timer, the second timer effect is not determined to be the short timer or the middle timer, and the second timer effect is faster than the first timer effect. A long timer with a long timer subtraction time is also determined. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from being lowered due to the display of a short timer after the first timer effect.

(Suggestion event determination table)
FIG. 52(a) is a diagram showing a suggestive event determination table for one-time timer referred to when determining a suggestive event in the case of executing one timer effect during one variable effect. The suggested event determination table for one-time timer is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) for each suggested event, and shows the number of pseudo-runs for reference.

Also, FIG. 52(b) is a diagram showing a suggestive event determination table for two timers referred to when determining a suggestive event in the case where the timer effect is executed twice during one variable effect. The double-timer suggestive event determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) for each suggestive event, and shows the number of pseudo-runs for reference.

Note that the "suggestion event" is an effect or the like notified after the timer subtraction time reaches "0". In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of suggestive events are set as suggestive events notified by the timer effect: pseudo-run, SP reach, SPSP reach, resurrection, and all-rotation reach effect.

(Stock effect determination process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, stock effect determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing stock effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

Note that the "stock effect" is an effect that suggests the occurrence of any one of a plurality of events that make players expect that a jackpot game will be executed in the process of executing the variable effect. In the stock effect of the present embodiment, the color change of the variable icon (the variable icon change effect) is executed when the stock is released.

In this embodiment, when the stock effect is started (when the stock icon is displayed), it is difficult for the player to determine what the event (suggestion event) suggested by the stock effect is. More specifically, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, there is no suggestion of what will happen (what the suggested event is) when the stock icon is started to be displayed (released). .

Therefore, although the player can recognize that something will happen (some kind of effect will occur), it is difficult for the player to grasp what will happen until the stock icon is activated. , at the time when the display mode of the variation icon changes due to the activation of the stock icon (the notification of the suggestion event) (when the color of the variation icon changes), the suggestion event of the stock effect is the color change of the variation icon. It can be determined that

First, in step S1455-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the change scenario of the icon corresponding to the variable icon, and determines in step S1455-2 whether or not the variable icon change effect is to be executed. If the icon change effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1455-3, and if the icon change effect is not to be executed, the current stock effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1455-3, the sub CPU 120a refers to the current variation effect pattern, and in step S1455-4, whether or not the reach effect (SP reach, SPSP reach, resurrection, full rotation reach) is executed. determine whether If it is SP reach or more, the process moves to step S1455-5, and if it is not SP reach or more, this stock effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1455-5, the sub CPU 120a determines the number of executions of the stock effect using the stock effect execution determination table (FIG. 54(a)). The details of this stock effect execution determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 54(a).

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1455-6 whether or not execution of the stock effect has been determined. If execution of the stock effect has been determined (if the number of stock icons ≥ 1), the process proceeds to step S1455-7, and if execution of the stock effect has not been determined (if the number of stock icons = 0) , the current stock effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1455-7, the sub CPU 120a determines the standby time type classified by the length of the standby time of the stock icon using the stock activation pattern determination table (FIG. 54(b)). The details of the stock activation pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 54(b).

In step S1455-8, the sub CPU 120a sets a stock effect specifying command indicating the number of stock icons and the standby time type in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock effect specifying command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the process for executing the stock effect is performed.

(Stock production execution decision table)
FIG. 54(a) is a diagram showing a stock effect execution determination table that is referred to when determining the number of stock icons in the stock effect. The stock effect execution determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the number of icon color changes in the variation, the variation effect pattern, and the allocation ratio (%) of the number of stock icons.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stock effect is more likely to be determined in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result, and the likelihood of a big win is low. The stock effect is more likely to be determined when the ready-to-win effect with high expectation for big win is executed than when the effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Stock activation pattern determination table)
FIG. 54(b) is a diagram showing a stock activation pattern determination table referred to when determining the type of standby time of a stock icon. The stock activation pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result and the distribution ratio (%) of the standby time type. The stock activation pattern determination table defines the number of stock icons and the waiting times of the first and second stock icons as stock activation patterns (execution patterns of stock effects).

Two kinds of waiting time types are set: waiting time A, which is a short waiting time, and waiting time B, which is a long waiting time (waiting time A<waiting time B). In this embodiment, two kinds of waiting time types are shown, but one kind or three or more kinds of waiting times may be set.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), in the stock effect of this embodiment, when there is one stock icon, standby time A or standby time B is determined. When there are two stock icons, standby time A is determined as the standby time for the first stock icon, and standby time B is determined as the standby time for the second stock icon. It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher for waiting time B than for waiting time A (waiting time A<waiting time B). Also, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher for two stock icons than for one stock icon (1 stock icon<2 stock icons).

The first feature of the stock activation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54(b) is that when there is only one stock icon, the standby time B is longer in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result. The standby time B is more likely to be determined when a ready-to-win performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed than when a ready-to-win performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the waiting time B is more likely to be determined when a ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed than when a ready-to-win effect with a low degree of expectation for a big win is executed. ing. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit, the easier it is to determine a longer waiting time. By doing so, the longer the waiting time in the stock effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player has a sense of expectation with respect to the length of the waiting time of the stock icon, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

Here, as will be described in detail later, in the stock effect of this embodiment, when there are a plurality of stock icons (two in this embodiment), two stock icons are displayed at the same time, and two stock icons are displayed. After waiting time A, the first stock icon is activated, and after waiting time B, the second stock icon is activated. In other words, in the stock effect of this embodiment, after two stock icons are displayed at the same time, the first stock icon and the second stock icon are activated with a time lag.

(Cut-in pattern determination processing)
Next, cut-in determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing cut-in determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

"Cut-in" means that a cut-in image is displayed, and the display color of the cut-in image suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. In this embodiment, a cut-in is displayed at the end of SP reach, SP reach, or the like.

First, in step S1456-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the current variable effect pattern, and in step S1456-2, the effect above the SP reach (one of SP reach, SPSP reach, revival, and full rotation reach ) is executed. If it is SP reach or more, the process moves to step S1456-3, and if it is not SP reach or more, this cut-in determination process is terminated.

In step S1456-3, sub CPU 120a determines a cut-in pattern (one of green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in) using the cut-in pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). Details of this cut-in pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1456-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the cut-in designation command corresponding to the determined cut-in pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and terminates the cut-in determination process. As a result, a cut-in pattern specification command is transmitted to the image control unit 150, and processing for executing cut-in display is performed.

(Cut-in pattern determination table)
FIG. 56 shows a cut-in pattern determination table referred to when determining a cut-in pattern. The cut-in pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) for each cut-in pattern.

In the cut-in pattern determination table, three types of cut-in patterns (green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in) with different jackpot expectations are set, green cut-in<red cut-in<gold cut-in. Expectations for the jackpot are increasing in the order of.

As a feature of the cut-in pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56, a cut-in pattern with a high jackpot expectation is more likely to be determined in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and fluctuations with a low jackpot expectation. A cut-in pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is more likely to be determined when a variable performance pattern with a higher degree of expectation for a big win is determined than when a pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Error notification start processing)
Next, the error notification start processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing error notification start processing in the effect control section 120m.

As described above, "error notification" is a generic term for notification of various errors, and in this embodiment, RAM clear notification, power supply recovery notification, abnormal prize winning error notification, magnetic detection error Includes open error notification, switch disconnection error notification, and plate full error notification. Further, the error notification is performed using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the decoration lighting device 34, etc., as will be described in detail later.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and various types of error notification can be set, and error notifications other than those listed above may be included.

First, in step S1511-1, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the RAM clear command. If it is the RAM clear command, the process moves to step S1511-2, and if it is not the RAM clear command, the process moves to step S1511-3.

The sub CPU 120a performs RAM clear notification start processing in step S1511-2. Specifically, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for starting the RAM clear notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the RAM clear notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification start process ends.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1511-3 whether or not the received command is a power restoration command. If it is a power recovery command, the process moves to step S1511-4, and if it is not a power recovery command, the process moves to step S1511-5.

In step S1511-4, the sub CPU 120a performs power recovery notification start processing. Specifically, when the received command is a power restoration command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing power restoration notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and the process for executing the power restoration notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification start process ends.

In step S1511-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is an abnormal prize winning error designation command. If it is an abnormal winning error designation command, the process is moved to step S1511-6, and if it is not an abnormal winning error designation command, the process is moved to step S1511-7.

In step S1511-6, the sub CPU 120a performs abnormal winning error notification start processing. Specifically, when the received command is an abnormal winning error designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing abnormal winning error notification to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing abnormal winning error notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification start process ends.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1511-7 whether or not the received command is a magnetic detection error designation command. If it is a magnetic detection error designation command, the process moves to step S1511-8, and if it is not a magnetic detection error designation command, the process moves to step S1511-9.

In step S1511-8, the sub CPU 120a performs magnetic detection error notification start processing. Specifically, when the received command is a magnetic detection error designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing magnetic detection error notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the magnetic detection error notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification start process ends.

In step S1511-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is the winning frequency abnormality error designation command. If it is the winning frequency abnormality error designation command, the process moves to step S1511-10, and if it is not the winning frequency abnormality error designation command, the process moves to step S1511-11.

In step S1511-10, the sub CPU 120a performs a winning frequency abnormality error notification start process. Specifically, when the received command is a winning frequency abnormality error designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing a winning frequency abnormality error notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the winning frequency abnormality error notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification start process ends.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1511-11 whether or not the received command is a door opening start designation command. If it is the door opening start designation command, the process moves to step S1511-12, and if it is not the door opening start designation command, the process moves to step S1511-13.

In step S1511-12, the sub CPU 120a performs door open error notification start processing. Specifically, when the received command is a door opening start designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing door opening error notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the door open error notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification start process ends.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1511-13 whether or not the received command is a switch disconnection error start designation command. If it is the switch disconnection error start designation command, the process moves to step S1511-14, and if it is not the switch disconnection error start designation command, the process moves to step S1511-15.

In step S1511-14, the sub CPU 120a performs switch disconnection error notification start processing. Specifically, when the received command is a switch disconnection error start designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing switch disconnection error notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing switch disconnection error notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification start process ends.

In step S1511-15, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is a full-dish error start designation command. If it is a command to specify the start of a full-dish error, the process proceeds to step S1511-16.

In step S1511-16, the sub CPU 120a performs a full-dish error notification start process. More specifically, when the received command is a full-dish error start designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing a full-dish error notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the full tray error notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification start process ends.

(Error notification end determination process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, error notification end determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing error notification end determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

First, in step S1520-1, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the RAM clear notification is being executed. If the RAM clear notification is being executed, the process moves to step S1520-2, and if the RAM clear notification is not being executed, the process moves to step S1520-4.

In step S1520-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 120 seconds have passed since the start of the RAM clear notification. If 120 seconds have passed since the start of the RAM clear notification, the process is moved to step S1520-3, and if 120 seconds have not passed since the start of the RAM clear notification, the current error notification end determination process is terminated. .

In step S1520-3, the sub CPU 120a performs RAM clearing notification end processing for ending the RAM clearing notification that is already being executed. In this RAM clear notification end process, a notification end instruction command for ending the RAM clear notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for ending the RAM clear notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification end determination process ends.

In step S1520-4, sub CPU 120a determines whether power restoration notification is being executed. If the power restoration notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1520-5, and if the power restoration notification is not being performed, the process is moved to step S1520-11. In this processing, the sub CPU 120a performs the power restoration notification by the image display device 31 (display of the error notification image of the power restoration notification), the notification by the audio output device 32 (notification by sound), and the decorative lighting device. When at least one of the notifications by 34 (notifications by lamps) is being executed, it is determined that the power restoration notification is being executed.

In step S1520-5, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not a dedicated image is being displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the error notification image (see FIG. 99) for notifying the restoration of power is being displayed. If it is determined that the error notification dedicated image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1520-6, and if it is determined that the error notification dedicated image is not being displayed, the process is moved to step S1520-9. .

Sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the next command has been received in step S1520-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the next command such as the variation start command has been received. If it is determined that the next command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1520-7, and if it is determined that the next command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1520-9.

The "next command" includes, for example, a variation start command (variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main CPU 110a, a variation stop command, a customer waiting state specification command, an opening specification command, a round specification command, and an ending specification. Commands, etc. are commands that occur with the passage of time (excluding start-up winning designation commands). When the sub CPU 120a receives any of these commands, the sub CPU 120a terminates the display of the power recovery notification image (error notification dedicated image 300B).

In step S1520-7, the sub CPU 120a performs power recovery screen display end processing for ending the display of the power recovery screen (display of the error notification dedicated image) that is already being executed. In this power restoration screen display end processing, a display end instruction command for ending the display of the power restoration screen (error notification dedicated image) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, a display termination instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150, and processing for terminating the display of the power restoration screen is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S1520-8.

In step S1520-8, sub CPU 120a performs icon appearance effect redetermination processing. In the icon appearance effect redetermining process, it is determined whether or not there is an icon non-appearing flag in a predetermined backup area of the sub RAM 120c, and if there is an icon non-appearing flag, the icon appearance state redetermining process is performed. The details of this icon appearance effect re-determining process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current error notification end determination process ends.

In step S1520-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the termination condition for the power restoration notification is satisfied. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a determines that the end condition for the power restoration notification is satisfied when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the power restoration notification and the following command has been transmitted from the main CPU 110a. That is, while the power restoration notification by the image display device 31 ends when the next command is received, the notification by the audio output device 32, the decorative lighting device 34, etc. is executed for 30 seconds. If the end condition for power restoration notification is satisfied, the process moves to step S1520-10, and if the end condition for power restoration notification is not satisfied, the current error notification end determination process is terminated.

In step S1520-10, the sub CPU 120a performs a power restoration notification end process for ending the power restoration notification (notification by image, sound, and lamp) that is already being executed. In this power restoration notification termination process, a notification termination instruction command for ending the power restoration notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and the process for executing the power restoration notification is performed.

In step S1520-11, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the door open error notification is being executed. If the door open error notification is being executed, the process moves to step S1520-12, and if the door open error notification is not being executed, the process moves to step S1520-14.

In step S1520-12, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not a door opening end designation command has been received. If the door open end designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S1520-13, and if the door open end designation command is not received, the current error notification end determination process is ended.

In step S1520-13, the sub CPU 120a performs door open error notification end processing for ending the door open error notification that is already being executed. In this door open error notification end processing, a notification end instruction command for ending the door open error notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for ending the door open error notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification end determination process ends.

In step S1520-14, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the switch disconnection error notification is being executed. If the switch disconnection error notification is being executed, the process moves to step S1520-15, and if the switch disconnection error notification is not being executed, the process moves to step S1520-17.

In step S1520-15, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not a switch disconnection error termination designation command has been received. If the switch disconnection error end designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S1520-16, and if the switch disconnection error end designation command is not received, the current error notification end determination process is terminated.

In step S1520-16, the sub CPU 120a performs switch disconnection error notification end processing for ending the switch disconnection error notification that is already being executed. In this switch disconnection error notification ending process, a notification termination instruction command for ending the switch disconnection error notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, a notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for ending the switch disconnection error notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification end determination process ends.

In step S1520-17, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the full tank error notification is being executed. If the plate full error notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1520-18, and if the plate full error notification is not being executed, the current error notification end determination processing is terminated.

In step S1520-18, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not it has received a full tank error end designation command. If the full-dish error end designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S1520-19, and if the full-dish full error end designation command is not received, the current error notification end determination process is ended.

In step S1520-19, the sub CPU 120a performs full-dish error notification end processing for ending the already-executed full-dish error notification. In this plate full error notification end processing, a notification end instruction command for ending the plate full error notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. As a result, the notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for ending the full-dish error notification is performed. When this process ends, the current error notification end determination process ends.

(Icon Appearance Effect Redetermination Processing)
Next, the icon appearance effect re-determining process of the effect control unit 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing icon appearance effect redetermination processing in the effect control unit 120m.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, "normal display", "delayed display", and "re-display" can be executed as icon appearance effects. The re-determination of the icon appearance effect is performed in a state where the icon has not yet been displayed (appeared) after the game ball has entered the first start port 14 or the second start port 15 (with the icon non-appearance flag). In the event of a power failure, the mode of icon appearance (either normal display, delayed display, or re-display) is determined again after power is restored (when the screen is restored).

In addition, in the icon appearance effect re-decision process, if "normal display" is decided, the pending icon will appear at the timing of the end of the display of the power recovery screen (when the screen returns), and if "delayed display" is decided , a pending icon appears at a timing Ta2 (after two seconds) from the end of display of the power recovery screen (see FIG. 116). In addition, when "redisplay" is determined, the hold icon appears at the timing when the display of the power restoration screen ends, disappears once, and is displayed again after the time Ta2 (2 seconds) after the display of the power restoration screen ends. Appear.

In the following description, the timing of ending the display of the power recovery notification dedicated screen (dedicated image 200B) may be described as "at the time of screen recovery".

First, sub CPU 120a refers to whether or not there is an icon non-appearance flag in step S1520-8-1. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an icon non-appearance flag in a predetermined backup area of the sub RAM 120c. If there is an icon non-appearance flag, the process proceeds to step S1520-8-2, and if there is no icon non-appearance flag, this icon appearance effect re-determining process ends.

In step S1520-8-2, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of redetermining the icon appearance mode. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received starting entry winning designation command, and uses the icon appearance effect determination table (see FIG. 41) to change the appearance mode of the pending icon, which has not been displayed, to normal display, Either delay display or re-display is determined again.

In step S1520-8-3, sub CPU 120a sets a command for displaying the undisplayed icon in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 120c. As a result, a command for making the undisplayed icon appear and display it is transmitted to the image control unit 150 or the like, and processing for making the icon appear is performed.

When the normal display is determined in the icon appearance effect redetermining process, the sub CPU 120a sets a command for making the icon appear when the screen returns to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. That is, when "normal display" is determined for an icon that has not been displayed, the icon will appear and be displayed when the screen returns. Further, in the icon appearance effect redetermining process, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, a command for making the icon appear two seconds after the screen is restored, when delayed display is decided. In other words, when "delayed display" is determined for an icon that has not been displayed, the icon will appear and be displayed after a predetermined time (two seconds) after the screen is restored. Further, in the icon appearance effect re-determining process, when re-display is decided, the sub CPU 120a stores a command for making the icon appear both when the screen is restored and two seconds after the screen is restored. Set in send buffer. That is, when it is decided to "redisplay" an icon that has not been displayed, the icon will appear twice: when the screen is restored and after a predetermined time (2 seconds) after the screen is restored. .

(Regarding specific examples of each production)
Specific examples of effects performed by the gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the present embodiment, the area formed by both or one of the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 31b (sub-liquid crystal) and in which effect display is performed is collectively referred to as "effect Display area 70", but the effects described as being performed in the effect display area 70 may be performed only by the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal), or may be performed by the second image display device. 31b (sub liquid crystal) only, or both the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal).

Also, in the following description, terms such as "full screen" and "full area" of the effect display area 70 (or the image display device 31) include both the first image display device 31a and the second image display device 31b. It is not limited to this, and includes the case of the entire screen or the entire area of the first image display device 31a.

(Mode selection)
First, various modes provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of modes. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a mode can be selected and set (customized) by a player's operation. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of effect modes with different background images and an auto button mode, which will be described later.

The operation of selecting and setting a mode (mode selection operation) can be performed during execution of the customer waiting effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 60(a), it is possible to display an operation reception screen 200 suggesting that mode selection can be performed during the customer waiting effect, and to receive the player's operation. Further, as shown in FIG. 60( a ), it is possible to indicate on the operation reception screen 200 that the mode can be selected by operating the operation lever 36 or the production button 35 .

As shown in FIGS. 60B and 60C, the effect mode is a mode in which the background image displayed on the image display device 31 is different. More specifically, the production modes are provided with production mode A (mountain mode) shown in FIG. 60(b) and production mode B (river mode) shown in FIG. 60(c).

The gaming machine 1 causes the image display device 31 to display a background image or the like in accordance with the determined effect mode. For example, when the "mountain mode" is determined, the background image 201a displaying the mountain scenery is displayed, and when the "river mode" is determined, the background image 201b displaying the river scenery is displayed. Let

In addition, the mountain mode and the river mode may be a production mode that can be selected in the normal game state (during the low probability non-time-saving game state), or during the low probability time-saving game state or during the high probability game state (during the electricity support ) may be a selectable production mode. Moreover, the production mode is not limited to two types, and three or more types may be provided. Furthermore, the production mode is not limited to one with different background images, and may be one with different characters displayed.

Also, in the effect mode, in addition to the background image being different, the image displayed as the pending icon or the variable icon may be different. For example, in the mountain mode, an icon image Ia (for example, an image of a snowman) is displayed as the pending icon or the variable icon, and in the river mode, an icon image Ib (for example, an image of a snowflake) is displayed. Various selections are possible, such as different icons and characters to be displayed depending on the presenting mode.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the auto button mode, "ON" and "OFF" can be selected by the operation of the player, and when "ON" is selected and determined, the auto button mode is set. In the following explanation, the case when the auto button mode is set (when the auto button mode is ON) is simply referred to as "auto button mode", and the case when the auto button mode is not set (when the auto button mode is OFF). case) may be simply described as "non-auto button mode".

Here, prior to the description of the auto button mode, the operation instruction presentation that is performed during variation will be described. "Operation instruction effect" is to display an operation instruction image 230 indicating a device (for example, the effect button 35) that the player can operate, and instruct the player to operate the device (for example, the effect button 35) (for example, "Push!"). ”, “PUSH”, “Consecutive hits!”, etc.). During the operation instruction effect, an image (image such as a meter) indicating a period (effective period) for accepting an operation to the device (effect button 35) is displayed together with the operation instruction image 230. FIG.

In the operation instruction effect of the present embodiment, an image showing the effect button 35 (see FIG. 87) is displayed together with a character image of "PUSH" indicating that the effect button 35 is pressed as the operation instruction image 230. FIG.

When the player operates the device (such as pressing the effect button 35) during the valid period, the effect (for example, cut-in display, winning/losing) that is the target of the operation instruction effect is displayed at the timing when the operation is performed. event such as notification) is performed. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the device (device operation) during the valid period, the effect (cut-in display, win/loss notification, etc.) that is the target of the operation instruction effect will be performed after the valid period has elapsed. done.

Here, when the "auto button mode" is set, an effect targeted for the operation instruction effect is performed at a predetermined timing even if the device operation is not performed during the valid period. That is, when the auto button mode is not set (non-auto button mode), if the player does not operate the device within the effective period, the effect targeted for the operation instruction effect is performed after the effective period has elapsed. On the other hand, in the auto button mode, an effect targeted for the operation instruction effect is performed at a predetermined timing before the valid period elapses. That is, in the auto button mode, an effect targeted for the operation instruction effect is performed before the end of the effective period, even though no device operation is performed.

In the following description, regardless of whether the auto button mode is ON or OFF, whether the player has operated the device, or whether the valid period has passed, the target of the operation instruction effect In some cases, the execution of the specified effect is described simply as “device activation” or “button activation”. Also, the timing of device activation (or button activation) may be described as "timing of device activation" or "timing of button activation". Furthermore, when the auto button mode is set, device activation by the auto button may be described as "auto button activation".

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the auto button mode is set, the operation instruction presentation is performed at the timing before the valid period elapses even though the device operation has not been performed. The target performance is performed.

Here, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timing of activating the button (timing of activating the auto button) when the auto button mode is set differs according to the effect mode. More specifically, in the game machine 1, the auto button is activated at the timing of 1/3 of the effective period in the mountain mode, and the auto button is activated at the timing of 2/3 of the effective period in the river mode. do.

(Mode for updating the number of reservations in the image display device and the reservation display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a manner of updating the pending number will be described.

In the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), the special figure determination information (first suspension) obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 is displayed in a predetermined manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the first reservation is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 72a as the reservation icon HI, and the number of the first reservation (first special symbol reservation number U1) is It is displayed in the first pending number display area 74a as a pending number.

Also, in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), the special figure determination information (second suspension) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is displayed in a predetermined manner. Specifically, the second reservation is displayed in the second reservation icon display area 72b as the reservation icon HI, and the number of the second reservation (second special symbol reservation number U2) is the second reservation number display area as the number reservation. 74b (see FIG. 93).

In addition, in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), the special figure determination information for which the big hit determination has been executed and the variable display (variable effect) is being executed is displayed as the variable icon TI in the variable icon display area 73. to be displayed.

Here, the increase update of the number of reservations in the first reservation number display area 74a and the second reservation number display area 74b (the number reservation increase update) is the winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 by the production control unit 120m It is done on the basis of receiving. More specifically, the increase update of the number reservation is performed at the time of winning on the condition that the effect control section 120m has received the winning designation command. In the following description, the first pending number display area 74a and the second pending number display area 74b may be collectively referred to simply as "the pending number display area 74".

In addition, the display (appearance display) of the pending icon HI is determined by the effect control unit 120m receiving a winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 and determining the display mode of the pending icon. done based on

In FIG. 61, as an example, when the number of first reservations is "2" (U1=2), the game ball Q wins (enters) the first start port 14, and the number of first reservations is " 3" (U1=3), the display mode of the pending icon HI, the first pending number display area 74a, and the first special symbol pending indicator 23 is shown.

In the following description, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, the first special symbol reservation display device 23, the second special symbol reservation display device 24, the normal symbol reservation The lamp group of the indicator 25, round number indicator 26, and right-handed indicator 27 may be generically described as "main lamp group 28".

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the first reservation icon HI, the number reservation in the first reservation number display area 74a, and the first special symbol reservation display 23 are used to display the first special symbol reservation number (U1). is provided. In addition, a second reservation icon HI, a number reservation in the second reservation number display area 74b, and a second special symbol reservation display 24 are provided to display the second special symbol reservation number (U2).

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the first reserved icon display area 72a is provided with display areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage sections of the first special figure determination information reserved storage area. Specifically, in the first reserved icon display area 72a, the first area R1 corresponding to the first storage section of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area, the second area R2 corresponding to the second storage section, the second A third region R3 corresponding to the three storage units and a fourth region R4 corresponding to the fourth storage unit are provided.

Further, in the second reserved icon display area 72b, display areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage sections of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area are provided. Specifically, in the second reserved icon display area 72b, the first area R1 corresponding to the first storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, the second area R2 corresponding to the second storage section, the second A third region R3 corresponding to the three storage units and a fourth region R4 corresponding to the fourth storage unit are provided.

As shown in FIG. 61(c), the first special symbol reservation display 23 can display the number of first reservations by combining the lighting modes of the two LEDs. Specifically, when the number of reservations is "0", the first special symbol reservation display 23 is in a state in which the two LEDs are turned off. In addition, when the number of the first reservation is "1", the first special symbol reservation display 23 is in a state where the upper LED of the two LEDs is lit, and the lower LED is extinguished. becomes. Moreover, when the number of the first suspension is "2", the first special symbol suspension display 23 is in a state where two LEDs are lit. In addition, when the number of first reservations is "3", the first special symbol reservation indicator 23 is in a state where the LED on the upper side of the two LEDs blinks, and the LED on the lower side lights up. becomes. Moreover, when the number of the first suspension is "4", the first special symbol suspension display 23 is in a state in which two LEDs blink.

Although illustration is omitted, when the game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 15, as with the first special symbol reservation display 23, the second special symbol reservation display 24 displays two The LED lights up in a manner indicating the number of second reservations.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), when the game ball Q wins (enters) the first starting port 14, at a predetermined timing, the number of pending icons HI and the first pending number display area 74a , And the display mode of the first special symbol reservation display 23 is updated from the display mode indicating that the number of reservations is "2" to the display mode that indicates that the number of reservations is "3". The first special symbol holding display 23 is updated at the timing of winning.

Here, the display timing (appearance timing) of the pending icon HI differs depending on the execution pattern of the icon appearance effect (regular display, delayed display, or re-display) (see FIG. 63). On the other hand, the timing at which the number of reservations in the number of reservations display area 74 is increased and displayed is limited to the time of winning.

It should be noted that when the variation is completed and the number of reservations changes from "3" to "2" (at the start of variation), the display mode of the reservation icon HI, the first reservation number display area 74a, and the first special symbol reservation indicator 23 , the display form indicating that the number of reservations is "3" is updated to the display form indicating that the number of reservations is "2".

As shown in FIG. 61(a), when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is "2", "two" reserved icons HI are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 72a. More specifically, when the pending number is "2" (U1=2), the pending icon HI is displayed in each of the first region R1 and the second region R2. In addition, when the number of reservations is "2", the number of "2" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 74a, and the number of reservations is "2" in the first special symbol reservation display 23. (in this embodiment, two LEDs are lit).

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(b), when the game ball Q wins (enters) the first start port 14 and the number of the first reserve becomes "3", the reserve icon HI is displayed and "three is displayed in the first pending icon display area 72a. More specifically, the hold icon HI is additionally displayed in the third region R3, and combined with the two hold icons HI already displayed in the first region R1 and the second region R2, a total of three hold Icon HI is displayed. Further, when the number of reservations becomes "3", the number of reservations is updated to display "3" in the first reservation number display area 74a, and the number of reservations is "3" in the first special symbol reservation display 23. The lighting mode of the LEDs is updated in a mode indicating that there is something (in this embodiment, the upper LED blinks and the lower LED lights up among the two LEDs).

In addition, when one change ends and the number of the first pending changes from "3" to "2", the "two" pending icons HI are displayed in the first pending icon display area 72a, and the first pending number The number "2" is displayed in the display area 74a, and the LED updates the lighting mode in the mode of displaying that the number of reservations is "2" in the first special symbol reservation indicator 23. The timing at which the number of reservations in the number-of-holds display area 74 decreases and is updated is limited to after the fixed stop (at the start of the next fluctuation).

It should be noted that each pending icon HI shifts toward the variable icon display area 73 each time one variation is completed. For example, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the pending icon HI displayed in the first region R1 is shifted to the variable icon display region 73 and displayed as the variable icon TI, and is displayed in the second region R2. The pending icon HI that has been displayed is shifted to the first area R1 and displayed. Also, the hold icon HI displayed in the third area R3 is shifted to the second area R2 and displayed.

In this manner, the display of the pending icon HI is performed after updating display of numeric pending (updating update). In addition, the update display of the pending number is performed only when the prize is won, whereas the display of the pending icon HI is performed when the prize is won or at a predetermined timing after the prize is won. There is

Here, the number-of-holds display area 74 does not change its position or size in the entire area of the effect display area 70 . That is, in the pending number display area 74, the number is only updated and displayed when the number pending update (increase update and decrease update) is performed, and the position and size of the pending number display area 74 do not change. Displayed in a maintained state (displayed without movement). In addition, the pending number display area 74 maintains the displayed state even when an effect such as SP reach is performed.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number-of-holds display area 74 does not move, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the number-of-holds display area may be displayed in such a manner that effects move around it, or it is displayed with movement such as changing in position or size.

In the following description, regarding an image (animation such as an image or an icon) displayed in the effect display area 70, the position and size in the effect display area 70 are maintained while numbers and characters are updated and displayed. In some cases, an object that is displayed without movement is simply described as "an object without movement (image)" (an object that does not move).

In this specification, what is described as "things that do not involve motion" includes icons, images, etc. It includes those that are displayed while maintaining the size and position in the effect display area 70 over time. More specifically, "things without motion" include things in which characters and numbers are updated and colors are changed while the size of the image is almost unchanged.

For example, it can be said that the display (number pending) in the pending number display area 74 does not involve movement.

In addition, regarding images and the like displayed in the effect display area 70 below, images and icons displayed with movement while maintaining the position and size in the effect display area 70, or images and icons displayed with movement in the effect display area 70 Images and icons that are displayed while changing are sometimes simply referred to as "moving objects (images)" (moving objects).

In this specification, what is described as "an object with motion" includes an object that continuously moves at a constant cycle, an object that changes its moving speed, and an object that is temporarily stopped after moving. For example, "animation" includes images, etc. that are temporarily stopped after appearing and then move before or after, and images that expand or contract. be

For example, the “thing accompanied by movement” includes a pending icon that is displayed to rotate while maintaining the position and size in the effect display area 70 . In addition, those that are statically displayed after scrolling, such as the effect pattern 38, and those that are emphasized, such as the pseudo-continuous image 216 (those accompanied by movement such as expanding and contracting after appearing), are also listed as "things accompanied by movement." be done.

(About icon movement)
As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an image imitating a snowman is displayed as the pending icon and the variable icon. In the following description, the pending icon and the variable icon may be collectively referred to simply as "icon I".

In this embodiment, the icon I is displayed as a rotating animation (periodic animation). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, the icon I is displayed with a motion of a snowflake animation rotating at a constant cycle. Further, when a plurality of icons I are displayed in the effect display area 70 (for example, when three icons I, that is, one relevant variable icon TI and two pending icons HI are displayed), the display All the icons I displayed are displayed as a periodic animation so as to be synchronized (see FIGS. 62(a) to (e)). That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is displayed with movement in each area while maintaining its position in each area (areas R1 to R4) except when shift display is performed. .

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and any icon images may be used. For example, as the icon image, various selections are possible, such as a spherical image, an image showing other motifs, and the like.

Further, the movement of the icon is not limited to the rotating movement as in the above-described embodiment, and may be accompanied by any movement such as shaking up and down or shaking left and right.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the hold icon HI is displayed with movement, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the icon may be displayed without movement while staying in each area, except when it is shifted and displayed (except for movement during shift).

(Example of icon appearance effect)
Next, a specific example of the icon appearance effect and the timing at which the icon appearance effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. FIG.

Note that, as described above, the hold icon HI and the variable icon TI are always displayed with a rotating motion. In the following description of each effect example, description of the movement of the pending icon HI and the variable icon TI will be omitted, but it is assumed that they are always displayed with movement (as periodic animation).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, three execution patterns of "normal display", "delayed display", and "re-display" are provided for the appearance mode of the pending icon HI.

(Timing of pending icon appearance)
First, with reference to FIG. 63, the timing at which the hold icon HI appears, the timing at which the winning sound is output, and the timing at which the number hold is updated in each execution pattern will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), in the normal display, when the game ball Q enters (wins) the starting hole (the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15), the timing at which the game ball Q wins the starting hole (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "TMa1 at the time of winning"), the update of the number pending (+1) and the output of the winning sound are performed. Also, in the normal display, a pending icon HI appears and displayed at TMa1 when winning a prize.

As shown in FIG. 63(b), in the delayed display, when the game ball Q enters the start hole (wins a prize), an update display (+1) of the number pending and a winning sound are output at the winning time TMa1. Further, in the delayed display, the pending icon HI appears and displayed at a timing TMa2 after a predetermined time has passed since the winning time TMa1 (for example, at a timing after two seconds have passed since the winning time TMa1).

As shown in FIG. 63(c), in the re-display, when the game ball Q enters the start hole (wins), the number suspension is updated (+1) and the winning sound is output at TMa1 at the time of winning. In addition, in the redisplay, after the pending icon HI appears at TMa1 when the prize is won, the pending icon HI disappears after a time Ta1 (for example, 1 second), and after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) from the time of winning TMa1. At timing TMa2, the hold icon HI appears and is displayed again.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 can give the player a sense of incompatibility by varying the timing at which the pending icon HI appears, and increase the expectation of a privilege such as a big winning game.

(Aspect of Icon Appearance Effect)
Next, an example of icon appearance effects will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 64 to 68, as an example, when the number of first reservations is "2" (U1=2), the game ball Q wins (enters) the first start port 14, and the number of first reservations is When it becomes "3" (U1=3), it shows the appearance mode of the pending icon HI, the updating mode of the number pending in the first pending number display area 74a, and the mode of the winning sound.

(Example of normal display)
First, an example of normal display will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), when the first pending number is "2", "2" is displayed as a number pending in the first pending number display area 74a, and in the first pending icon display area 72a, Two pending icons HI are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), when the game ball Q enters the first starting hole 14 (winning) and the first reserved number becomes "3", the first reserved number display area 74a is displayed at the time of winning TMa1. The number hold is updated from "2" to "3", and a prize winning sound (in the example of FIG. Also, the third pending icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the winning time TMa1. The example of FIG. 64(b) shows an example in which the pending icon HI appears above the first pending icon display area 72a. The suspended icon HI that has appeared appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 64(b)) in the first suspended icon display area 72a.

In this way, in the case of the normal display, at the time of winning TMa1 (immediately after winning), the pending icon HI appears (displays), the pending number in the pending number display area 74 (number pending) is updated, and the winning Sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 64(c), the suspended icon HI is displayed in the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 64(b)) of the first suspended icon display area 72a after it appears. That is, when the appearance operation of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed in each of the first region R1, the second region R2, and the third region R3, and a total of three pending icons HI are displayed. Become.

Note that, as described above, the hold icon HI is displayed with movement. More specifically, the hold icon HI is periodically moved to rotate (periodic animation). In addition, when a plurality of pending icons HI are displayed, the plurality of pending icons HI are displayed with movement so as to be synchronized.

Further, while the pending icon HI is displayed as an animation with movement, the pending number (numerical pending) displayed in the pending number display area 74 is displayed without motion. More specifically, the display of pending numbers does not change (is not updated) unless the conditions for increasing or decreasing the number of pending prizes (new wins or cancellation of pending prizes) are met. That is, the digit hold is displayed without movement. In addition, the number of reservations (number reservation) displayed in the number of reservations display area 74 maintains the displayed state (continues to be displayed) even when other effects such as SP reach effects are performed. .

Thus, in the gaming machine 1, the number of special symbol determination information (special symbol pending number) for which the big hit determination has not been executed (undetermined) is displayed in a plurality of modes (reserved icon or number pending). Further, in the gaming machine 1, the pending icon HI is displayed in a motional mode, whereas the pending number is displayed in a motionless mode.

With the above-described configuration, the gaming machine 1, in the display of the number of special figure determination information (number of reservations), suppresses the player's misunderstanding and misunderstanding by displaying the one that does not move (number reservation). A moving object (holding icon) can be displayed to please the player's eye.

(Example of delay display)
Next, an example of delay display will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the first pending number is "2", "2" is displayed as the number pending in the first pending number display area 74a, and the first pending icon display area 72a, Two pending icons HI are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the game ball Q wins the first starting port 14 and the first reserved number becomes "3", at the time of winning TMa1, the number reserved in the first reserved number display area 74a becomes " 2” is updated to “3”, and a prize-winning sound (in the example of FIG. 65, a “pop” sound) is output. In the case of the delayed display, the winning sound TMa1 is output at the time of winning, while the pending icon HI does not appear (is not appearing).

As shown in FIG. 65(c), the third pending icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at timing TMa2 after time Ta2 (two seconds in this embodiment) from the time of winning TMa1. That is, in the delayed display, the pending icon HI appears later than in the normal display. This embodiment shows an example in which the pending icon HI appears above the first pending icon display area 72a. The suspended icon HI that has appeared appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 65(c)) in the first suspended icon display area 72a.

As shown in FIG. 65(d), after the pending icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 64(b)) in the first pending icon display area 72a. That is, when the appearance operation of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed in each of the first region R1, the second region R2, and the third region R3, and a total of three pending icons HI are displayed. Become.

In this way, in the case of the delayed display (when a delay occurs), when winning (immediately after winning), the number of pending numbers in the pending number display area 74 (number pending) is increased and updated, and the winning sound is output. On the other hand, the display of the pending icon HI is performed at a timing TMa2 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the winning time TMa1. From the opposite point of view, in the gaming machine 1, even if the display (appearance) of the hold icon HI is delayed, the timing of outputting the winning sound and updating display of the number hold is constant.

As a result, the game machine 1 suppresses the misunderstanding by the player that there was no increase in the hold when the delay display or the like is executed, and gives the player a sense of incongruity to improve the interest of the game. can be made

(Example of re-display)
Next, an example of redisplay will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), when the first pending number is "2", "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 74a, and the first pending icon display area 72a has two pending Icon HI is displayed

As shown in FIG. 66(b), when the game ball Q wins the first starting port 14 and the first reserved number becomes "3", at the time of winning TMa1, the number reserved in the first reserved number display area 74a becomes " 2” is updated to “3”, and a prize-winning sound (in the example of FIG. 64, a “pop” sound) is output. Also, the third pending icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the winning time TMa1. The suspended icon HI that has appeared appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 64(b)) in the first suspended icon display area 72a.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), after the pending icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 66(c)) in the first pending icon display area 72a. That is, when the first appearance operation of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed in each of the first region R1, the second region R2, and the third region R3, and a total of three pending icons HI are displayed. state.

As shown in FIG. 66(d), the suspended icon HI that has appeared disappears (the suspended icon HI disappears) after a time Ta1 (one second later in this embodiment) from the winning time TMa1. FIG. 66(d) shows an example in which an effect is performed such that the hold icon HI pops and disappears. Note that even if the pending icon HI is hidden (disappears), the update mode of the first pending number display area 74a (display of "3" indicating that U1=3) is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 66(e), the hidden pending icon HI reappears in the effect display area 70 at a timing TMa2 after a time Ta2 (two seconds in this embodiment) from the winning time TMa1. The suspended icon HI that has appeared appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 66(e)) in the first suspended icon display area 72a.

As shown in FIG. 66(f), the reappearing pending icon HI is displayed in the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 66(f)) in the first pending icon display area 72a. That is, when the second appearance operation of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed in each of the first region R1, the second region R2, and the third region R3, and a total of three pending icons HI are displayed. state.

As described above, in the case of re-display, at the time of winning TMa1 (immediately after winning), the display (appearance) of the pending icon HI, the increase update of the number pending in the pending number display area 74, and the output of the winning sound is performed, and the pending icon HI is displayed (appears) again at a timing TMa2 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the winning time TMa1. From the opposite point of view, it can be said that one hold icon HI is displayed twice in the redisplay. Also, even in the case of re-display, the output of the winning sound and the increment update of the number hold are performed once at a fixed timing (once at the same timing as the normal display).

In this way, in the gaming machine 1, in the normal display, the pending icon HI appears and displayed at the time of winning, while in the delayed display, the pending icon is displayed (appears) later than the normal display, and in the redisplay, the pending icon is displayed two times. Display (appear) times.

In addition, as described above, in the icon appearance effect (icon appearance effect performed during the normal game state) triggered by winning the first start port, the display is delayed or redisplayed compared to the normal display. In the case of winning, the expectation of the jackpot is higher. In other words, in the gaming machine 1, in the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state), the case where the pending icon HI appears and is displayed at the winning time TMa1 and the case where it appears and is displayed at the timing TMa2 , and the degree of expectation for a big win is different (the degree of expectation for a big win is TMa1 at the time of winning a prize<Timing TMa2).

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can give the player a sense of incongruity, improve the interest in the game, and heighten expectations for a big win. In other words, in the gaming machine 1, by displaying the pending icon HI at a timing different from that of the normal display, it is possible to improve the expectation for the granting of benefits such as a big win.

In addition, as described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is an icon appearance effect during the high probability time saving game state (icon appearance effect performed with the winning of the second start port 15 during the high probability game state) , there is no difference in the degree of expectation for the jackpot between the normal display and the delayed display, and the degree of expectation for the jackpot of the re-display is higher than the normal display and the delayed display (normal display = delayed display < re-display). That is, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, when the pending icon appears twice (redisplay) than when the pending icon appears once for one winning (normal display or delayed display), the jackpot expectation Is high. As a result, the gaming machine 1 draws attention to whether or not the pending icon reappears (whether it disappears and then reappears) in the game in the high-probability time-saving game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be done.

Furthermore, as described above, in the icon appearance effect (icon appearance effect performed during the normal game state) triggered by winning the first start port, the display is delayed or redisplayed compared to the normal display. If it is broken, there is a high possibility that it will develop into a production with high expectations for a big hit such as SP reach (expectation for development to SP reach or higher: normal display <delayed display = redisplay). In other words, in the gaming machine 1, in the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state), the case where the pending icon HI appears and is displayed at the winning time TMa1 and the case where it appears and is displayed at the timing TMa2 , the probability of development to an effect with a high expectation of a big win is different (the expectation of development of TMa1 at the time of winning a prize<the expectation of development at timing TMa2).

As a result, the gaming machine 1 gives the player a sense of incongruity and sharpness to the game, and provides more advanced guessing elements (guessing information) when the player guesses whether or not a big win has been awarded. be able to. That is, even if the display color of the pending icon HI is not so high as to expect a big hit (for example, if it is a white icon or a blue icon), if a delay display etc. is performed, development to SP reach etc. It is possible to heighten expectations for future performances.

Further, in the gaming machine 1, re-display can be executed in addition to delayed display. That is, in the gaming machine 1, there are cases where the pending icon HI appears when winning a prize, when it appears after a delay (at timing TMa2), and when it appears twice, when winning a prize and at timing TMa2.

As a result, the game machine 1 can increase the interest of the game by adding diversity to the single phenomenon "appearance of the pending icon HI".

Further, in the gaming machine 1, a plurality of timings for the appearance of the pending icon HI are provided. (Timing at which U=+1) is assumed to be constant.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the number of pending icons while improving the interest of the game by changing the display timing of the pending icons.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which normal display, delayed display, and re-display are provided for the icon appearance effect under a plurality of conditions (normal game state and time-saving game state), but the gaming machine of the present invention does so. However, only normal display may be performed under certain conditions, and normal display and delayed display may be performed under other conditions (delayed display and redisplay may not be performed under certain conditions).

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may have a configuration in which the execution mode and the like are different between the icon appearance effect performed under certain conditions and the icon appearance effect performed under other conditions. For example, two execution modes (normal display and delay display) may be used in the low probability game state, and three execution modes (normal display, delay display, and redisplay) may be used in the high probability game state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the execution patterns (normal display, delay display, and re-display), but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in all conditions (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state, and high-probability time-saving gaming state), the icon appearance production is executed according to the execution pattern. Although a different example has been shown, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this.

That is, the gaming machine of the present invention, the icon appearance effect that is performed under certain conditions (for example, non-time-saving gaming state and low-probability gaming state) and other conditions (for example, time-saving gaming state and high-probability gaming state) The icon appearance effect performed in and may be changed in the degree of expectation for the jackpot depending on the execution pattern (under certain conditions, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is different, and under certain conditions, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is the same, etc.), A common jackpot expectation level may be used in icon appearance effects under all conditions (eg, the jackpot expectation level is the same under all conditions, or the jackpot expectation level is different under all conditions).

Also, in the gaming machine of the present invention, there is no difference in the degree of expectation for big wins depending on the execution pattern in both the icon appearance effect performed under certain conditions and the icon appearance effect performed under other conditions. (the jackpot expectation is the same under any condition).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the normal game state (condition A), the low probability time-saving game state (condition B), and the high probability time-saving game state (condition C), an example of giving a change in the degree of expectation of a big hit However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this, and each configuration may be changed under other conditions, or may be made common (whether or not the expected degree of jackpot is common, execution Whether or not the pattern is shared, etc.) can be selected in various ways.

In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which whether or not to perform a delay display or the like is determined for each reception of a start-up winning designation command, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined to execute "delayed display" for one pending icon HI triggered by the winning of the starting port (first starting port 14 or second starting port 15), after that 1 or a plurality of pending icons HI corresponding to winning a prize may be displayed with a delay so as to be interlocked.

A specific example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 67, when it is decided to delay display or redisplay for one pending icon HI, for example, a "delay flag" can be turned ON. In the following description, the pending icon HI for which the delayed display is determined first may be referred to as "target pending icon HI" ("suspended A" in FIG. 67).

Here, when the delay flag is ON, the pending icon HI (holding icon HI displayed after the target holding icon HI) corresponding to the winning of the start opening after the winning of the target holding icon HI is delayed display. It is decided to do Note that the delay flag can be turned OFF when the target pending icon HI is digested as the variable icon TI (when the variable display ends). Also, when the delay flag is turned OFF, it is determined which of normal display, delayed display, and re-display is executed for the pending icon HI related to subsequent winnings.

In this way, when the delay display is determined for one pending icon HI, the delay flag is turned ON until the pending icon HI is digested as the variable icon TI, and the start while the delay flag is ON. All of the pending icons HI related to winning prizes may be displayed with a delay. Incidentally, when re-display is determined, the re-display flag may be turned ON, and the pending icon HI related to the subsequent prize winning may be re-displayed in conjunction therewith.

According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to give the player a stronger impression (uncomfortableness, etc.), heighten expectations, and further improve the amusement of the game.

Although each aspect of the icon appearance effect performed by the gaming machine 1 has been described above, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments.

For example, in the present embodiment, the pending icon is accompanied by movement when it appears or is being displayed, but the pending icon may not be accompanied by movement. For example, the pending icon may remain in each area of the pending icon display area 72 and be displayed without any movement such as rotating, except during a shift.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which both delayed display and re-display can be executed in the icon appearance effect. may be executed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the appearance timing of the pending icon is the time TMa1 at the time of winning in the normal display, and the time Ta2 (2 seconds later) after the time of winning TMa1 in the delayed display. The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the appearance timing of the pending icon is set to 0.5 seconds after winning the prize in normal display, and 3 seconds after winning in delayed display. Various selections are possible.

(An example of winning flash effects)
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, an example of winning flash effects will be described.

As described above, the "winning flash effect" is performed by outputting a predetermined sound or emitting light from the navel lamp 34c or the like in a predetermined manner when the game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. It is a production that will be done. In the winning flash effect, when a prize is won in the start opening (first start opening 14 or second start opening 15), the navel lamp 34c is illuminated in a predetermined manner and a specific sound is output.

As described above, the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" are provided in the winning flash effect of the present embodiment. In the "weak pattern", the navel lamp 34c emits white light and the specific sound A is output. Further, in the "strong pattern", the navel lamp 34c emits red light and the specific sound B is output.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the winning flash effect, the navel lamp 34c starts emitting light in a manner (white light emission or red light emission) corresponding to the determined pattern (weak pattern or strong pattern) from the time of winning, and the winning flash effect is performed. Light emission of the navel lamp 34c continues until the suspended icon HI that has changed is digested as the variable icon TI. Also, the output of the specific sound is executed when the prize is won.

In the present embodiment, the sound effect "beep" is output from the sound output device 32 as the specific sound A of the weak pattern, and the sound effect "beep" is output from the sound output device 32 as the specific sound B of the strong pattern. be.

FIGS. 68(a) to (c) show an example of a weak winning flash effect pattern. In addition, in FIG. 68, as an example, when the number of first reservations is "2" (U1=2), the game ball Q wins (enters) the first starting port 14, and the number of first reservations is When it becomes "3" (U1=3), it shows the mode of the winning flash effect, the updating mode of the first pending number display area 74a, and the mode of the winning sound and the specific sound.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the first pending number is "2", "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 74a, and the first pending icon display area 72a has two pending Icon HI is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), when the game ball Q enters the first starting hole 14 (winning) and the first reserved number becomes "3", the first reserved number display area 74a is displayed at the time of winning TMa1. The number hold is updated from "2" to "3", and a prize winning sound (in the example of FIG. Also, at the winning time TMa1, a specific sound A (a sound effect of "Pickin") is output from the audio output device 32, and the navel lamp 34c starts emitting white light.

At this time, the prize-winning sound (“Pokon” sound) and the specific sound A (“Pikin” sound effect) are output from the audio output device 32 at the same time. The specific sound A (the effect sound "Pickin") is a performance sound that the player wants to hear especially for the purpose of making the player expect a big win, so the volume is louder than the winning sound (the sound "Pokong"). Alternatively, it is a sound that is output in a manner that is likely to appeal to auditory sense, such as being expressed in a high-pitched range. Therefore, even if the winning sound (“popping” sound) and the specific sound A (“popping” sound effect) are output from the audio output device 32 at the same time, the winning sound (“popping” sound) people may not be able to hear. However, a configuration in which sound output control is selectively used according to specific conditions, such as not outputting a prize-winning sound (sound "pokon") when a specific sound A (sound effect "picking") is output. , allows the winning sound (“popping sound”) and the specific sound A (“picking” effect sound) to be output from the audio output device 32 at the same time (winning prize sound (“popping sound”) ), it is possible to reduce the control load related to the sound output of the gaming machine. In addition, if the purpose is to prevent the mixed output of the winning sound (sound "pokon") and the specific sound A (sound effect "pickin"), the specific sound A (sound effect "pickin") ) is output, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning sound (the sound of "popping") is not output.

As shown in FIGS. 68(c) and 69, the navel lamp 34c continues to emit white light even after winning a prize. Note that the navel lamp 34c continues to emit white light until the pending icon HI, which is the object of the winning flash effect, is digested as the variable icon TI (until the end of the variation when the big win determination result is displayed as the variable icon TI). (See Figure 69).

FIGS. 68(d) to (f) show an example of a strong pattern of winning flash effect. As shown in FIG. 68(d), when the first pending number is "2", "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 74a, and the first pending icon display area 72a has two pending Icon HI is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 68(e), when the game ball Q enters the first starting hole 14 (winning) and the first reserved number becomes "3", the first reserved number display area 74a is displayed at the time of winning TMa1. The number hold is updated from "2" to "3", and a prize winning sound (in the example of FIG. Also, at TMa1 when the player wins a prize, a specific sound B (a sound effect of "beep-beep") is output from the audio output device 32, and the navel lamp 34c starts emitting red light.

At this time, the prize-winning sound (“pokon” sound) and the specific sound B (“beep-beep-beep” effect sound) are output from the audio output device 32 at the same time. The specific sound B (the sound effect of "blinking") is a production sound that the player particularly wants to hear in order to make the player expect a big win. Alternatively, it is a sound that is output in a manner that is likely to appeal to auditory sense, such as being expressed in a high-pitched range. Therefore, even if the winning sound (“popping sound”) and the specific sound B (“popping sound effect”) are output from the audio output device 32 at the same time, the winning sound (“popping sound”) people may not be able to hear. However, a configuration in which sound output control is selectively used according to specific conditions, such as not outputting a prize-winning sound (sound "popping") when a specific sound B (sound effect "blinking") is output. , the winning sound (“popping sound”) and the specific sound B (“popping sound”) are allowed to be output from the audio output device 32 at the same time (the winning sound (“popping” sound) ), it is possible to reduce the control load related to the sound output of the gaming machine. In addition, if the purpose is to prevent the mixed output of the winning sound (sound "popon") and the specific sound B (sound effect "pikipikien"), the specific sound B (sound effect "pikipikien") ) is output, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning sound (the sound of "popping") is not output.

As shown in FIGS. 68(f) and 69, the navel lamp 34c continues to emit red light even after winning a prize. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 69, the navel lamp 34c is kept on until the pending icon HI, which is the object of the winning flash effect, is digested as the variable icon TI (until the end of the variation when the jackpot determination result is displayed as the variable icon TI). , continue to emit red light.

As described above, the game machine 1 can execute an effect by sound or light emission as one of the look-ahead effects in addition to the effect performed in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31). As a result, the gaming machine 1 can enhance the amusement of the game through a (intuitive) presentation that appeals to the intuition of the player.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the expectation of a big win is higher when the winning flash effect is performed than when the winning flash effect is not performed. Furthermore, the expectation of a big win is higher when a strong pattern is executed than when a weak pattern is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of no winning flash effect<weak pattern<strong pattern.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can suggest the degree of expectation for a big win so as to appeal to the player's intuition, and the player can intuitively recognize the degree of expectation for a big win. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can increase the player's expectation for a big win and improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the winning flash effects may have different configurations, execution timings, and the degree of expectation for big wins.

For example, in the winning flash effect, as in the present embodiment, a specific sound may be output once for each start-up winning (a specific sound is output only once at the time of winning), A specific sound may be output a plurality of times with respect to one start winning prize. Also, the winning flash effect is not limited to being performed at the time of winning, but may be performed at a predetermined timing after the time of winning.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, the winning flash effect may have a plurality of execution timings such as a normal pattern, a delay pattern, and a re-execution pattern. For example, as a normal pattern, when a prize is won, a specific sound is output and the navel lamp 34c starts emitting light, and as a delay pattern, a specific sound is output and the navel lamp 34c is turned on after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds, or during a hold shift) after the win. Light emission is started, and as a re-execution pattern, when a prize is won, a specific sound is output and light emission of the navel lamp 34c is started, and a specific sound is output again after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds later, or during a hold shift) after the prize is won. It can be a thing.

In addition, when a re-execution pattern (when a specific sound is output twice) is provided in the winning flash effect, the specific sound of the weak pattern is output during the first execution, and the specific sound of the strong pattern is output during the second execution. You may provide a pattern (promoting pattern) to output . With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win based on both the number and manner of winning flash effects.

Also, the aspect of the winning flash effect is not limited to the present embodiment, and various selections are possible. For example, in the winning flash effect of the present embodiment, both the output of the sound (specific sound) and the light emission of the lamp (navel lamp 34c) are executed. (Heso lamp 34c) may be executed.

Further, as a winning flash effect, other lamps (for example, the decorative lighting device 34, the frame lighting device 34b, etc.) may be caused to emit light instead of or in addition to the navel lamp 34c. Also, in the flash effect at the time of winning, any sound (for example, voice output of a character, output of music, etc.) may be output as the specific sound.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in both the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, an example is shown in which the winning flash effect is executed, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this, and under certain conditions ( For example, the winning flash effect may be performed in a non-time-saving game state), and the winning flash effect may not be performed under other conditions (for example, a time-saving game state).

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, there is no difference in the degree of expectation for a big win depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed (whether or not the winning flash effect is performed) and the execution pattern (whether it is a weak pattern or a strong pattern, etc.). It may be a thing (the jackpot expectation is the same).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a winning flash effect (a winning flash effect during a non-time-saving game state) triggered by winning the first start port 14 and a prize winning triggered by winning the second start port 15 An example in which the flash performance (the winning flash performance during the time-saving game state) is common in the execution mode, execution pattern, and degree of expectation for a big win has been shown, but the game machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment.

Specifically, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a winning flash effect is performed under a plurality of conditions, a winning flash effect performed under certain conditions (for example, a non-time-saving gaming state or a low-probability gaming state) and a winning flash effect are performed. , the execution mode, execution timing, jackpot expectation level, etc. may be common to or different from the prize winning flash effect performed under other conditions (for example, a short-time game state or a high-probability game state).

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when all or part of the winning flash effect execution mode, execution timing, and jackpot expectation are different depending on the conditions, when it is in a non-time-saving game state and when it is in a time-saving game state In addition to making it different between when it is in the middle, it may be different when it is in the low probability game state and when it is in the high probability game state, and each configuration may be different under other conditions. good.

For example, under certain conditions, the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on whether or not a game is executed or the pattern of execution, and under other conditions, the degree of expectation for a big win may not differ, or the degree of expectation for a big win may indirectly differ. To give a specific example, during the low probability game state, the low pattern<strong pattern jackpot expectation level, and during the high probability game state, the weak pattern=strong pattern jackpot expectation level. Also, for example, during a non-time-saving game state, there is a high possibility that other effects with high expectations for a big hit (such as changing the color of the pending icon and developing SP reach) will occur in the order of no winning flash effect < with winning flash effect. (Indirectly, the degree of expectation for a big win is high), and during the time-saving game state, the degree of expectation for a big win may be increased in the order of no winning flash effect <with winning flash effect.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may have different execution modes and execution timings for a winning flash effect performed under certain conditions and a winning flash effect performed under other conditions. For example, during the low-probability game state, one execution timing (specific sound output at the time of winning) may be set, and during the high-probability game state, two execution timings (normal pattern, delay pattern, etc.) may be set.

Furthermore, in the winning flash effect of the present embodiment, an example in which the navel lamp 34c is caused to emit light has been shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, in the winning flash effect, other lamps (the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, etc.) of the decorative lighting device 34 may be caused to emit light. Also, in the winning flash effect, the lamp may emit light of any color.

(color change of hold icon)
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the timing at which the display color of the pending icon HI is updated (the timing at which the pending icon change effect is performed) will be described.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment changes the colors of the variable icon and the pending icon according to the change scenario determined by the sub CPU 120a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 71, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the color of the pending icon is changed in the advance variation, the color change of the pending icon (holding icon change effect) shifts within the pending icon display area. It is done when it is displayed (at the time of shift).

For example, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, a scenario (in the case of scenario 06) is determined in which the pending icon HI is displayed as a white blinking icon as an initial mode, and changes from the white blinking icon to the blue icon two changes before. In this case, the pending icon HI that was displayed as a blinking white icon when the initial mode was displayed (when winning in the example of FIG. 72) is displayed in blue when shifted from the third region R3 to the second region R2. Change to icon.

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is performed only when the icon is shifted. In other words, the change in color of the pending icon HI is executed at a single timing (fixed timing).

It should be noted that the descriptions such as "single timing", "fixed timing" or "limited timing" in this specification mean that the It means that the timing for some or one event is fixed. In other words, "single timing" or "fixed timing" does not mean timing with a constant period (periodic timing, for example, timing in 30-second units), etc., but rather timing for some event. means fixed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the timing of appearance (display) of the pending icon HI is diversified, while the timing of changing the color of the pending icon HI is fixed. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the color change of the pending icon HI is performed only when the icon is shifted, whereas the color change of the variable icon TI is performed only when the variable effect is being executed. done at various times.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 uses a single tool (image) called a “reserved icon” to provide the player with various information such as the timing and color of display (appearance), and the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege (jackpot). can be shown. That is, the gaming machine 1 gives information indicating the time difference (delay display, etc.) and information about the display color to one tool called a hold icon, and the player guesses the degree of expectation for a big win based on this information. It becomes possible to As a result, the gaming machine 1 can suggest various information to the player while adding variety to the game. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can further enhance the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention may cause the belly button 34c to emit light in synchronization with the display color of the hold icon HI and the variable icon TI. This makes it easier to sensuously recognize the color mode of the icon (suspended icon or the variable icon). As a result, the game machine 1 can further enhance the performance effect and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the icon may not be displayed depending on the effect performed in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31). For example, in the case of an effect such as SPSP ready-to-win where the expectation of a big win is high, the variable icon and the pending icon may not be displayed. Further, when the variable icon is no longer displayed, the emission of the navel lamp 34c may be extinguished so as to synchronize with the non-display of the icon.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, even when the icon is not displayed (for example, while SPSP reach is being performed), the navel lamp 34c continues to emit light corresponding to the color of the icon. may be In such a configuration, for example, the navel lamp 34c may continue to be lit until the end of the fluctuation.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example in which the color of the pending icon is changed only during the shift has been shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the pending icon can be changed. may be performed at a timing other than the time of shift.

(About production during fluctuation)
Next, a specific example of an effect during variation executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, a plurality of variable effect patterns are provided (variable effect patterns 1 to 21), and based on each variable effect pattern, the effect display area 70 (image display device 31) and the audio output device 32, an effect is performed by a decorative lighting device 34 and the like.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variable display that displays the result of the big hit determination related to the variable icon TI, scrolling of the production pattern 38, action at the start of the fluctuation, advance notice of dialogue, pseudo consecutive, timer production, stock production, Each production such as an operation instruction production is performed. In the following description, various effects that are performed in the variable display may be referred to as "variation effects".

As shown in FIG. 74, whether or not to execute the effect during variation, an execution pattern, and the like are determined based on the effect control unit 120m receiving a variation pattern designation command. That is, each effect during variation is determined based on the effect control unit 120m receiving the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the start of variation. From another point of view, the image displayed in the effect during fluctuation and the movement (action) of the effect pattern 38 etc. performed in the effect during change are determined by the effect control unit 120m based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command. It can be said that it is a thing (an image etc.) which shows having decided medium production|presentation. For example, it can be said that the pseudo-continuation notice image 214 in the pseudo-continuation indicates that the effect control section 120m has decided to execute the pseudo-continuation based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command. Further, it can be said that the timer image 220 displayed in the timer effect indicates that the effect control section 120m has decided to execute the timer effect based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 74, at the start of fluctuation, the number pending displayed in the pending number display area 74 is decremented by "1" and updated, and the pending icon HI is decreased by one.

(Scrolling operation of production pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 75, the production design 38 is confirmed and stopped, the scrolling operation of the production design 38 from the start of the next fluctuation until the production design 38 is fixed and stopped, the mode of the small production design 48, the number A pending update mode will be described.

FIG. 75(a) shows a state in which the fixed stop is performed when the first pending number is "3" (U1=3). As shown in FIG. 75(a), at the time of finalization stop, the three performance symbols 38 are displayed in the performance display area 70 in a stopped state. At this time, the small effect pattern 48 is also stop-displayed in the same mode as the effect pattern 38 (losing mode or big hit mode).

As shown in FIG. 75(b), when the variation (next variation) is started, the motion (scrolling) of the three performance symbols 38 is started. More specifically, the effect display area 70 is scrolled in a flowing direction (in the present embodiment, from above to below) in the direction of the effect pattern 38 after the start of fluctuation. Also, the effect pattern 38 is scrolled while changing the speed from acceleration (low speed)→high speed→deceleration (low speed) from the start of scrolling to the fixed stop. Further, the number pending in the first pending number display area 74a is updated and displayed in a mode in which the pending number is decreased by one (from "3" to "2" in the example of FIG. 75).

In the following description, the state in which the effect pattern 38 is scrolling (the state in which it is moving in a flowing manner) is simply referred to as "scrolling" regardless of whether it is accelerating or decelerating. may be explained as In addition, when the effect pattern 38 is scrolled at high speed (also referred to as "high-speed scrolling"), the effect pattern 38 may be difficult to distinguish or visually recognized. "Scrolling" in the following description includes such a state (high-speed scrolling) in which discrimination and visual recognition of the effect pattern 38 are difficult.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75(b), at the time of start of fluctuation, the number pending in the first pending number display area 74a is reduced by "1" and updated and displayed, and the pending icon HI in the first pending icon display area 72a Decrease by one and shift display. Furthermore, after the start of the variation, the small effect pattern 48 is also displayed in a manner (scrolling, etc.) indicating that it is being varied in the same manner as the effect pattern 38.

As shown in FIG. 75(c), after scrolling, the effect pattern 38 is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, substantially in the center) of the effect display area 70 while maintaining the position (temporary stop) while swinging up and down.

Note that an eye-catching image 250 may be displayed between the temporary stop of the effect symbol 38 and the final stop (see FIG. 89(e)). Note that the "eye-catching image 250" is an image that is displayed in substantially the entire area of the effect display area 70, and can display, for example, a model name or a character image corresponding to the model.

As shown in FIG. 75(d), after the effect pattern 38 is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the effect pattern 38 is displayed in a stopped state (fixed stop). At this time, the small effect pattern 48 is stopped and displayed in the same manner as the effect pattern 38 (loss mode or big hit mode). Further, as shown in FIG. 75(e), after the fixed stop, the next variation is started.

(Example of action at the start of fluctuation)
Next, an example of the action at the start of fluctuation will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG.

As described above, the “change start action” is an effect performed immediately after the start of change.

The action at the time of starting the fluctuation of this embodiment is a production in which the production pattern 38 moves differently from normal (when the action at the time of fluctuation starting is not executed) (see FIG. 77).

As shown in FIG. 77(a), in the action at the start of variation of the present embodiment, the effect symbol 38 makes a horizontal rotation motion immediately after the start of variation. Further, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the effect pattern 38 performs an action of moving in a direction (upward) different from the scrolling direction after the rotating motion.

As shown in FIG. 77(c), scrolling is started after the action at the start of fluctuation. In other words, when the action at the start of fluctuation is not executed (when the action at the start of fluctuation is not executed), scrolling is performed immediately after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 76(a)), whereas the action at the start of fluctuation is performed. is executed, scrolling is started after the action at the start of fluctuation is completed (see FIG. 76(b)).

As described above, when the action at the start of the fluctuation is performed, the expectation of the big hit is higher than when the action at the start of the fluctuation is not performed (no action at the start of the fluctuation <with action at the start of the fluctuation). Therefore, the game machine 1 can increase the expectation of the player by developing an effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big win in the future by executing the action at the time of starting the fluctuation.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the action at the start of variation may be configured differently from that of this embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example was shown in which the effect pattern 38 was used to perform the action at the time of start of fluctuation. , it may be performed using an image other than the effect pattern 38, or may be performed by displaying an effect or the like at the start of the variation. Furthermore, while some action effect is performed at the start of each change, an action longer than the normal action effect may be performed as the action at the start of the change.

Further, in the variation start action of the present embodiment, the image (effect pattern 38) for performing the variation start action is accompanied by movement, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the action at the start of fluctuation may be performed using an image that does not involve movement.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example of one type of execution pattern of the action at the start of fluctuation (one type of action in which the production pattern 38 rotates) was shown, but the action at the start of fluctuation is provided with a plurality of execution patterns. may be In addition, if multiple execution patterns are provided for the action at the start of the fluctuation, the degree of expectation for the jackpot may differ depending on the execution pattern (character type, effect color, movement, etc.), or depending on the type of execution pattern Regardless, the jackpot expectation may be the same.

Furthermore, in the action at the start of variation of the present embodiment, both the action at the start of variation performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and the action at the start of variation performed under other conditions (time-saving gaming state) are common Although the execution pattern (one type of execution pattern) is shown as an example, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the contents and types of execution patterns may be different between the action at the start of variation performed under certain conditions and the action at the start of variation performed under other conditions ( 1 under some conditions, 3 under other conditions, etc.).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example was shown in which the action at the start of fluctuation was executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this , the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed under certain conditions, and the action at the start of fluctuation may not be executed under other conditions.

Furthermore, in the action at the start of fluctuation in the present embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the presence or absence of the action at the start of fluctuation. There is no difference in the expected level of jackpot depending on the execution pattern (the expected level of jackpot is the same), or the one that suggests the development of other effects depending on the presence or absence of execution and the execution pattern (those that indirectly differ in the expected level of jackpot). may

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the action at the start of variation is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and the action at the start of variation performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state), For both the action at the start of the fluctuation performed under other conditions (time-saving gaming state), the expected level of the jackpot differs depending on whether or not the action at the start of the fluctuation is executed (the expected level of the jackpot differs under all conditions). , the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the action at the start of variation performed under certain conditions and the action at the start of variation performed under other conditions have the same level of expectation for big wins depending on whether or not they are executed and execution patterns (all conditions It may be common to the jackpot expectations below), or it may be varied (eg, the jackpot expectations are the same under certain conditions, and the jackpot expectations are different under other conditions).

(Example of dialogue notice)
Next, an example of a dialog announcement will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78. FIG.

As described above, the "line notice" means that a line, a character, or the like indicating the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), and a voice corresponding to the line is displayed. This is an effect output from the output device 32 .

As shown in FIG. 76(c), the dialogue announcement is made after the time Tb has passed (for example, after 2 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation. In other words, there is a case where the speech announcement occurs after the time Tb from the start of the fluctuation. That is, in the present embodiment, the dialogue announcement occurs at a single timing (time Tb after the start of fluctuation) (timing is fixed).

As shown in FIG. 78(a), scrolling is started immediately after the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), the character image 210 and the dialogue image 212 are displayed after the time Tb from the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, in the dialog preview, the dialog image 212 is displayed in addition to the characters and the like being displayed together with the frame image. Further, a sound corresponding to the dialogue image 212 is output from the sound output device 32 . In this embodiment, an example of outputting the voice corresponding to the dialog in the dialog announcement is shown, but the output of the voice may not be performed.

Further, as described above, in the dialog preview, the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the display color of the dialog image 212 and the content of the dialog. Specifically, for the serif image 212, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of white<red<golden<rainbow (probable).

Note that the character image 210 and the dialogue image 212 are displayed at predetermined positions (for example, the left side or the lower side of the effect display area 70). Also, the character image 210 and the dialogue image 212 do not change in display position or size from the time they are displayed until they disappear. That is, the images (the character image 210 and the dialogue image 212) displayed in the dialogue announcement are displayed without movement. On the other hand, in the dialogue notice, the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested depending on the mode, such as the display color of the dialogue. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can increase the player's interest in matters such as whether or not a dialogue announcement will occur, and in what color the dialogue will be displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In this way, in the dialogue notice, the execution timing is one (fixed execution timing), whereas the mode of the dialogue (display color, dialogue content, etc.) suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot (the expectation for the jackpot is different).

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and may have a configuration different from that of the present embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which both the character image 210 and the dialog image 212 are displayed in the dialog notice is shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the dialog notice displays only the dialog image 212. It may be carried out using

Also, in the dialog preview of the present embodiment, an example in which the displayed images (the character image 210 and the dialog image 212) do not involve movement has been shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the images (the character image 210 and the dialogue image 212) displayed in the dialogue announcement may be accompanied by movement. For example, the dialog announcement may involve movement such as the frame of the dialog image 212 swinging, or the character's mouth moving to match the dialog (lip sync).

Also, the timing at which the speech notice is generated is not limited to two seconds after the start of the variation, and may be performed after a predetermined time from the start of the variation.

Furthermore, in the dialogue notice of the present embodiment, both the dialogue notice performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and the dialogue notice performed under other conditions (time-saving gaming state) are common execution patterns. is shown as an example, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the content and type of the execution pattern may be different between the dialogue announcement performed under certain conditions and the dialogue announcement performed under other conditions (under certain conditions 1 kind, under other conditions 3 kinds, etc.).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the dialogue notice is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the dialogue announcement under certain conditions and not to execute the dialogue announcement under other conditions.

Furthermore, in the dialogue notice of the present embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot differs depending on the presence or absence of the notice of the dialogue. the same), or suggesting the development of other effects depending on whether or not they are executed or the pattern of execution (those that indirectly differ in the degree of expectation for a big win).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the dialogue notice is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and the dialogue notice performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and other conditions Regarding both the dialogue notice performed in the (time-saving game state), an example in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot differs depending on whether or not the prediction for the dialogue is executed (the degree of expectation for the jackpot differs under all conditions) was shown, but the game of the present invention The machine is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the presence or absence of execution and the execution pattern is common between the announcement of the dialogue performed under certain conditions and the announcement of the dialogue performed under other conditions (the expectation of a big win under all conditions It may be the same degree), or it may be varied (such as the same jackpot expectation under certain conditions and different jackpot expectations under other conditions).

(Pseudo Ren)
Next, pseudo-runs will be described with reference to FIGS. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are cases in which the number of pseudo-runs is performed once and in which the number of pseudo-runs is performed twice during one variation.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the maximum number of pseudo-runs executed during one variation is two (reaching pseudo-3), but the gaming machine of the present invention is limited to this embodiment. Instead, pseudo-runs may be performed three times or more.

As described above, the pseudo run of this embodiment includes the normal pseudo (N pseudo) and the post-reach pseudo (post-R pseudo). As described above, "normal pseudo" indicates that the two performance symbols 38 develop into a pseudo run without becoming a reach (in a non-reach state). Further, "pseudo after reach" indicates that the two performance symbols 38 develop into a pseudo run after becoming a reach.

In the case of pseudo 2 stop, normal pseudo (N pseudo) that develops into pseudo run without reaching reach is performed once, and post-reach pseudo (post-R pseudo) that develops into pseudo run after reach is performed once. It may be done.

Furthermore, in the case of pseudo 3 arrival, when the normal pseudo is performed after the normal pseudo (N pseudo → N pseudo) and when the reach after pseudo is performed after the normal pseudo (N pseudo → R There are three patterns of after-pseudo) and when after-reach pseudo-pseudo is performed after reach-after-pseudo is performed (R-after-pseudo->R-after-pseudo).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal simulation is not performed after the post-reach simulation is performed during one variation. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the post-reach simulation is performed during one variation, the post-reach simulation is always performed in the subsequent simulated runs.

In addition, as described above, the height of the expectation of the jackpot is pseudo continuous <pseudo 2 stay <pseudo 3 arrival, N pseudo < R post pseudo < N pseudo + N pseudo < N pseudo + R post pseudo < R post Pseudo+R after Pseudo.

When pseudo-running is performed, pseudo-variation is performed multiple times. For example, as shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), in the case of one pseudo consecutive number (in the case of pseudo 2 stay), the second pseudo variation after the first pseudo variation (pseudo 1 variation) (pseudo 2-variation) is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 80, when the number of pseudo-runs is two (in the case of reaching pseudo-3), the second pseudo-fluctuation (pseudo-2 fluctuation) is performed after the first pseudo-fluctuation (pseudo-1 fluctuation). , the third pseudo fluctuation (pseudo 3 fluctuation) is performed after the second pseudo fluctuation (pseudo 2 fluctuation).

Further, when a pseudo-continuation is performed, a pseudo-continuation notice is provided. In the pseudo-repeat notice, an image (pseudo-repeat notice image 214) suggesting that the pseudo-repeat will be performed is displayed. In the present embodiment, a character image of "Continue" is displayed as the pseudo-continuation notice image 214 (see FIG. 81(a)).

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 80, in the case of the normal simulation, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after the time Tc1 from the pseudo-continuous announcement (display of the pseudo-continuous announcement image 214). Further, as shown in FIGS. 79B and 80, in the case of the pseudo-reach, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after the time Tc2 from the pseudo-continuous notice (display of the pseudo-continuous notice image 214).

As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the pseudo-continuous announcement, the pseudo-continuous announcement image 214 is once enlarged and displayed when it appears in the effect display area 70, and then displayed for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) so as to sway. That is, the pseudo-continuous preview image 214 is displayed with movement.

As shown in FIG. 81(c), a pseudo-continuation image 216 indicating the start of a pseudo-continuation is displayed after a time period Tc1 after the pseudo-continuation preview image 214 is displayed. In this embodiment, a character image of "NEXT" is displayed as the pseudo-continuous image 216 (see FIG. 81(c)). When the pseudo-continuous image 216 appears in the effect display area 70, it is displayed in a swaying manner after being displayed in an enlarged manner, and then stopped and displayed. That is, the pseudo-continuous images 216 are displayed with movement.

Below, a specific example of normal pseudo in case of pseudo 2 stay, a specific example of reach after pseudo in case of pseudo 2 stay, and a specific example of when reach after pseudo is performed after normal pseudo in the case of pseudo 3 arrival , respectively.

(An example of normal pseudo in the case of pseudo 2 stop)
FIG. 81 shows an example of normal simulation in the case of pseudo 2 only. As shown in FIG. 79( a ), pseudo-continuous notice (display of pseudo-continuous notice image 214 ) is performed at a predetermined timing after the start of fluctuation (during pseudo 1 fluctuation). Also, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing when the time Tc1 has passed since the pseudo-continuous notice.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the pseudo consecutive notice is given during the pseudo 1 fluctuation after the start of fluctuation. Specifically, the pseudo-run preview image 214 is displayed during the pseudo-1 change, suggesting that the pseudo-run will be performed.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), two effect symbols 38 are displayed without being ready-to-win during pseudo 1 variation. More specifically, two production patterns 38 showing different numbers (“5” and “7” in the example of FIG. 81(b)) descend (scroll) from above toward the approximate center, and the production It is displayed substantially in the center of the display area 70 (non-reach symbol display).

As shown in FIG. 81(c), after the two effect symbols 38 are displayed without reaching the ready-to-win state, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed. Also, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is highlighted (displayed in an enlarged manner, or displayed with an effect, etc.) when displayed. In this way, the pseudo-continue image 216 is displayed (after the non-reach symbol is displayed) at the timing Tc1 after the pseudo-continuation notice image 214 (the character image of "Continue" in FIG. 81) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 81(d), the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears (disappears) after being displayed, and pseudo-secondary variation is performed. In the pseudo-2 variation, two production patterns 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 81) descend (scroll) from above toward the approximate center and are displayed in the approximate center of the production display area 70. It is done (reach pattern display). In addition, at the timing when the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed or at the timing after the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears, a pseudo-variation indicating what number of times the pseudo-variation occurs (whether it is currently pseudo-2 or pseudo-3). A change count display image 217 (“x2” image in FIG. 81(d)) may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 81(e), in the pseudo 2 variation, two effect symbols 38 are displayed in the ready-to-win state.

As shown in FIG. 81(f), an image indicating development to SP reach (in the example of FIG. 81, development notification image 218 of "SP development") is displayed after becoming reach.

(An example of pseudo after reach in case of pseudo 2 stay)
FIG. 82 shows an example of post-reach pseudo in case of pseudo 2 stay. As shown in FIG. 79(b), pseudo-continuous notice (display of pseudo-continuous notice image 214) is performed at a predetermined timing after the start of fluctuation (during pseudo-1 fluctuation). Also, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing when the time Tc2 has passed since the pseudo-continuous notice.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), the pseudo consecutive notice is given during the pseudo 1 fluctuation after the start of fluctuation. Specifically, the pseudo-run preview image 214 is displayed during the pseudo-1 change, suggesting that the pseudo-run will be performed.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), two performance symbols 38 showing the same number ("5" in the example of FIG. 81) descend (scroll) from above toward the center during pseudo 1 variation. In addition, the two production patterns 38 descend while decelerating so as to agitate whether or not the game will reach reach.

As shown in FIG. 82(c), in the effect display area 70, two effect patterns 38 are displayed as reach. The two production patterns 38 are once enlarged and highlighted, and displayed substantially in the center of the production display area 70.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 82(d), after two effect symbols 38 are displayed as ready-to-win, a pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed. Also, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is highlighted (displayed in an enlarged manner, or displayed with an effect, etc.) when displayed.

In this manner, in the after-reach simulation, the pseudo-continue image 216 is displayed after the time Tc2 (after the ready-to-win pattern is displayed) after the pseudo-continuation notice image 214 is displayed. In addition, in the after-reach simulation, when the two production patterns 38 are displayed, the reach fanning or the like occurs. Therefore, when the post-reach simulation is performed, the time from the display of the pseudo-continuation notice image 214 to the display of the pseudo-continuation image 216 is longer than when the normal simulation is performed (time Tc1<time Tc2 ). In other words, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after the pseudo-continuous notice is generated in the after-reach simulation rather than the timing at which the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after the pseudo-continuous notice is generated in the case of the normal simulation. The timing to be executed is the later timing.

As shown in FIG. 82(e), the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears (disappears) after being displayed, and pseudo-secondary variation is performed. In the pseudo-2 variation, two production patterns 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 82) descend (scroll) from above toward the approximate center and are displayed in the approximate center of the production display area 70. It is done (reach pattern display). In addition, at the timing when the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed or at the timing after the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears, a pseudo-variation indicating what number of times the pseudo-variation occurs (whether it is currently pseudo-2 or pseudo-3). A variation count display image 217 (“x2” image in FIG. 82(e)) may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 82(f), an image indicating development to SP reach (in the example of FIG. 82, development notification image 218 of "SP development") is displayed after reaching reach.

(Example of pseudo 3 arrival)
FIG. 83 shows an example of a case where the post-reach simulation is performed after the normal simulation is performed in the case of the pseudo 3 reach. As shown in FIG. 80, pseudo-continuous notice (display of pseudo-continuous notice image 214) is performed at a predetermined timing during pseudo 1 fluctuation and pseudo 2 fluctuation. Also, the first pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing when time Tc1 has passed since the first pseudo-continuous notice, and the second pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing when time Tc2 has passed since the second pseudo-continuous notice. is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the first pseudo consecutive notice is given during the pseudo 1 fluctuation after the start of fluctuation. Specifically, the first pseudo-repeat preview image 214 is displayed during the pseudo-1 fluctuation, suggesting that the pseudo-repeat will be performed.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), two performance symbols 38 are displayed without being ready-to-win during pseudo 1 variation. More specifically, two production patterns 38 indicating different numbers (“5” and “7” in the example of FIG. 81) descend (scroll) from above toward the approximate center, and the production display area 70 is displayed. It is displayed in the approximate center of (non-reach pattern display).

As shown in FIG. 83(c), after the two performance symbols 38 are displayed without reaching the ready-to-win state, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed for the first time. Also, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is highlighted (displayed in an enlarged manner, or displayed with an effect, etc.) when displayed. In this way, the pseudo-continue image 216 is displayed (after the non-reach symbols are displayed) at the timing Tc1 after the pseudo-continuation notice image 214 (the character image of "Continue" in FIG. 83) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 83(d), the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears (disappears) after being displayed, and a pseudo-2 change is performed. In addition, at the timing when the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed or at the timing after the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears, a pseudo-variation indicating what number of times the pseudo-variation occurs (whether it is currently pseudo-2 or pseudo-3). A variation count display image 217 (in FIG. 83(d), an image of “×2” indicating pseudo 2 variation) may be displayed. A second pseudo continuous notice is given during the pseudo 2 fluctuation. Specifically, the display of the pseudo-repeat preview image 214 is performed for the second time during the pseudo-second fluctuation, suggesting that the pseudo-repeat will be performed.

As shown in FIG. 83(e), in the pseudo-2 variation, two performance symbols 38 showing the same number ("5" in the example of FIG. 83) descend (scroll) from above toward the approximate center. In addition, the two production patterns 38 descend while decelerating so as to agitate whether or not the game will reach reach.

As shown in FIG. 83(f), in the effect display area 70, two effect patterns 38 are displayed as reach. The two production patterns 38 are once enlarged and highlighted, and displayed substantially in the center of the production display area 70.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 84(a), after the two effect symbols 38 are displayed as ready-to-win, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed for the second time. Also, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is highlighted (displayed in an enlarged manner, or displayed with an effect, etc.) when displayed. In this way, the pseudo-continue image 216 is displayed at the timing Tc2 after the pseudo-continue notice image 214 is displayed (after the ready-to-win pattern is displayed).

As shown in FIG. 84(b), the pseudo-continuous image 216 displayed for the second time disappears (disappears) after being displayed, and a pseudo-3-variation is performed. In addition, at the timing when the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed or at the timing after the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears, a pseudo-variation indicating what number of times the pseudo-variation occurs (whether it is currently pseudo-2 or pseudo-3). A change count display image 217 (in FIG. 84(b), an image of “×3” indicating pseudo 3 changes) may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 84(b), in the pseudo 2 variation, two production patterns 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 84) descend (scroll) from above toward the approximate center, It descends while decelerating to incite whether it will be a reach or not.

As shown in FIG. 84(c), an image indicating development to SP reach (in the example of FIG. 84(c), development notification image 218 of "SP development") is displayed after reaching reach.

In this way, when pseudo-runs are performed, regardless of whether the number of pseudo-runs is 1 (pseudo 2 stop) or 2 (pseudo 3 reached), in the case of normal pseudo A pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed before establishment of a ready-to-win state (at a timing after a predetermined time has passed since the start of pseudo fluctuation and before establishment of a ready-to-reach state). is displayed. More specifically, regardless of whether it is the first pseudo-repeat (pseudo-2) or the second pseudo-repeat (pseudo-3), the pseudo-repeat notice image 214 is displayed in the case of the normal pseudo-repeat. A pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after a time Tc1 from , and a pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after a time Tc2 after the pseudo-continuous notice image 214 is displayed in the case of post-reach pseudo.

In addition, the jackpot expectation is N pseudo (pseudo 2 stay) <R post pseudo (pseudo 2 stay) < N pseudo + N pseudo (reaching pseudo 3) < N pseudo + R post pseudo (reaching pseudo 3) < R The order is post-pseudo+R post-pseudo (reaching pseudo-3).

As a result, the game machine 1 attracts interest as to whether or not the pseudo-run will reach reach, and whether or not the pseudo-run will stop at the pseudo-2 or reach the pseudo-3, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the configuration of the pseudo-run may be different from that of this embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous preview image 214 and the pseudo-continuous image 216 are shown as examples with motion, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the pseudo-continuation preview image 214 and the pseudo-continuation image 216 displayed in the pseudo-continuation may be displayed without movement.

For example, the pseudo reunion preview image 214 is not limited to the text image of "Continue" of the present embodiment, but may be a predetermined motif (for example, an image with a butterfly motif) or an image of a character's words (for example, "I'm still going!"). , "Let's go more", etc.).

Also, the pseudo-continuous image 216 may not be stopped and displayed. For example, the pseudo-continuous image 216 may be displayed so as to sway when highlighted, or may be displayed so as to be repeatedly enlarged and reduced. In other words, the pseudo-continuous image 216 may be any image as long as it is displayed at a predetermined position in the effect display area 70 (for example, approximately in the center of the effect display area 70). Furthermore, the pseudo-run image 216 may represent a number (for example, 3 or 5), another character (such as "run"), or a predetermined motif image (for example, an image with a butterfly motif). or a character's words image (for example, "Let's go!").

Furthermore, in this embodiment, depending on the execution pattern such as the presence or absence of pseudo-runs, the number of pseudo-runs (one or two times), and the content (whether it is a normal pseudo or a pseudo after reach). Although different expectations are set, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment.

For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, there may be no difference in the degree of expectation for big wins (the degree of expectation for big wins is the same) depending on the presence or absence of pseudo-runs and execution patterns. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win may indirectly differ depending on the presence or absence of a pseudo run or the execution pattern. Specifically, although there is no difference in the degree of expectation for the jackpot itself depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuation is executed and the pattern of execution, it suggests the development of other productions (those that indirectly suggest the degree of expectation for the jackpot). may be

For example, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, compared to when the normal simulation is performed, when the after-reach simulation is performed, the expectation of the jackpot is higher (N simulation<R post-simulation), The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the degree of expectation of a big hit may be the same between when the normal simulation is performed and when the post-reach simulation is performed (N simulation=R post-simulation). In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the greater the number of pseudo consecutive times, the higher the expectation of a big win (pseudo 2 stop <pseudo 3 reaching), but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. Depending on the difference in the number of pseudo-runs, there may be no difference in the degree of expectation for the big win (pseudo 2 stop=pseudo 3 reach).

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the development to SP reach or higher is determined in either case of the normal simulation or the post-reach simulation. The gaming machine of the invention is not limited to this. More specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for development to SP reach or higher is as follows: no pseudo run < normal pseudo = post-reach pseudo (100% SP reach or higher in pseudo run). example. However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a pseudo-run occurs, it may not develop beyond SP reach, or when pseudo-reach is performed after reach than when pseudo-reach is performed, the expectation of development to SP reach or higher is higher, etc. (Expectation degree of development to SP reach or higher: normal pseudo<pseudo after reach), the degree of development expectation to SP reach or the like may differ depending on the timing of pseudo continuous occurrence.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as an example, a common execution pattern is used for both the pseudo-run under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and the pseudo-run under other conditions (time-saving gaming state). Although shown, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the contents and types of execution patterns may be different between pseudo-runs performed under certain conditions and pseudo-runs performed under other conditions (under certain conditions normal sims only, under other conditions normal sims and post-reach sims, etc.).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which pseudo-continuation is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. Pseudo-runs may be executed under certain conditions, and pseudo-runs may not be executed under other conditions.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that pseudo-continuation is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and pseudo-continuation performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state), and under other conditions An example is shown in which the expectation of the jackpot is different depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuation is executed and the execution pattern (the expectation of the jackpot is different under all conditions) for both the pseudo-continuation performed in the (time-saving game state). The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the degree of expectation for a big win based on the presence or absence of execution and the execution pattern is common between the pseudo-run under a certain condition and the pseudo-run under another condition (the expected jackpot under all conditions). It may be the same degree), or it may be varied (such as the same jackpot expectation under certain conditions and different jackpot expectations under other conditions).

(Example of timer effect)
Next, an example of a timer effect executed by the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the "timer effect" is an effect that suggests the occurrence of any one of a plurality of events that make one expect that a jackpot game will be executed in the process of executing the variable effect, and the timing of the event occurrence. be. In the timer effect, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of event when it is executed, but the type of event can be determined when the event occurs.

More specifically, the timer effect is to display a timer image 220 indicating the subtraction of time in the effect display area 70, and perform a countdown display (subtraction display) of the timer time. and the timing of the occurrence of a predetermined event. In the following description, the occurrence of a predetermined event that is the target of the timer effect may be described as "timer activation".

As described above, in the present embodiment, as events suggested by the timer effect, pseudo consecutive occurrence (or continuation of pseudo consecutive), development to SP reach, development to SP SP reach, revival, full rotation reach, etc. are suggested. set as an event. Note that the event suggested by the timer effect is not limited to the present embodiment, and may be other events (for example, winning/losing notification, icon color change, occurrence of cut-in, etc.).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of patterns of timer types (short timer, middle timer, and long timer) with different timer times are provided. The timer time is long, and the expectation of the jackpot is high. That is, in the gaming machine 1, the expectation of a big win is higher when the timer time is longer than when the timer subtraction time is short.

FIG. 85 shows, as an example, a case where a middle timer is determined as the timer type, and development to SPSP reach is reported as the suggestion event.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), a timer image 220 is displayed at a predetermined position of the effect display area 70 (in the example of FIG. 85, the lower right side of the effect display area 70) after a predetermined period of time from the start of the fluctuation, and the timer effect is started. be started.

Note that in the present embodiment, the timer image 220 is displayed without movement. Specifically, in this embodiment, after the timer image 220 is displayed, it is continuously displayed until the timer is activated while maintaining the size and position. Also, the timer image 220 is displayed with the timer time updated at any time while the size and position remain unchanged.

As shown in FIGS. 85(b) and 85(c), after the timer image 220 is displayed, the timer time of the timer image 220 is subtracted.

As shown in FIGS. 85(d) and (e), after the subtraction time of the timer image 220 reaches "0 seconds", an image (development notification image 222) is displayed to notify the development to the SPSP reach. For example, as the development notification image 222, an image such as "SPSP development" as shown in FIG. 85(e) can be displayed.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the timer effect is performed twice during one variation (when the timer is performed twice), when the first timer effect is the short timer, the second timer effect is the middle timer effect. Alternatively, when the long timer is determined and the first timer effect is the middle timer, the long timer is determined in the second timer effect (see FIG. 51(b)). That is, in the present embodiment, when the timer effect is performed a plurality of times, the timer subtraction time of the timer effect performed later is longer than the timer subtraction time of the timer effect performed earlier (the first timer effect time < second timer time).

In addition, in the timer effect of the present embodiment, when the number of times of the timer is two (multiple times), the two timer images 220 appear and are displayed at the same time, then the first timer is activated, and then the second timer is activated. The timer of is to be activated (displayed at the same time and activated with a time lag). Specifically, when the number of timers is two, a relatively short timer time (short timer or middle timer) is determined for the first timer effect, and a relatively long timer time (long timer) is determined for the second timer effect. timer) is determined. That is, in this embodiment, when the number of timers is two, two timer images 220 appear and are displayed at the same time, then the first timer (short timer or middle timer) is activated, and then A second timer (long timer) is activated.

Further, when the number of times of the timer is two, there are many cases where an effect with a higher expectation for a big win is performed when the timer is activated for the second time than when the timer is activated for the first time. For example, when the first timer is activated, a pseudo-continuation occurs, and when the second timer is activated, the development to SP reach is notified, or when the first timer is activated, the development to SPSP reach is notified, and the second timer is activated. When activated, a resurrection effect is performed, and an event is performed in which the timer activated later has a higher expectation for a big hit (see FIG. 52(b)).

To explain this chronologically from the player's point of view, when the timer effect is performed twice (when the number of timers is 2), the player's expectation for a big win in response to the first timer activation and It will be different from the big hit expectation held for timer activation. Specifically, from the player's point of view, the player's expectation for a big win for the second timer activation is higher than the player's expectation for a big win for the first timer activation. It means big. In other words, the degree of expectation for a big win estimated by the player is higher in the second timer effect than in the first timer effect (first timer<second timer).

As a result, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can increase the player's sense of expectation in a time-series manner and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. may be the same (first timer time≧second timer time).

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the timer effect is executed a plurality of times, the first timer is activated after the plurality of timer images 220 appear and are displayed at the same time as in the present embodiment. (displayed simultaneously and activated with a time lag). Also, in the gaming machine of the present invention, two timers may be activated simultaneously (simultaneously displayed and simultaneously activated). Furthermore, the second timer image 220 may be displayed after the first timer image 220 is displayed and before it is activated (displayed with a time lag, before the first timer is activated). A second timer image 220 appears).

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the timer effect may be configured differently from the present embodiment in addition to the configuration described above.

For example, in the present embodiment, the timer image 220 is displayed without movement (the frame image of the timer image 220 is displayed in a stopped state, and the time display portion of the timer is updated). , the timer image may be displayed with movement. For example, the timer image 220 is displayed so as to fluctuate during timer subtraction, and is displayed enlarged (highlighted) when the subtraction time is "0 seconds", or is displayed at a predetermined timing (timer time "0 seconds"). , the timing of starting the countdown, etc.), it may be accompanied by movement, such as moving to substantially the center of the effect display area 70 .

Furthermore, in the timer effect of the present embodiment, a common execution pattern (timer type and timer count) are shown as an example, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the contents and types of execution patterns may be different between timer effects performed under certain conditions and timer effects performed under other conditions (under certain conditions 1 kind, under other conditions 3 kinds, etc.).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the timer effect is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. The timer effect may be executed under certain conditions, and the timer effect may not be executed under other conditions.

Furthermore, in the timer effect of the present embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on whether or not the timer effect is performed and the execution pattern. the same degree of expectation), or may suggest the development of other effects depending on the presence or absence of execution or the execution pattern (indirectly differ in the degree of expectation for a big win).

When the timer effect is performed a plurality of times, the degree of expectation for big win may be the same between the first timer effect and the second and subsequent timer effects. For example, there may be no difference in the degree of expectation for a big win between an event performed by the first timer activation and an event performed by the second timer activation. To explain this phenomenon in chronological order from the player's point of view, when the timer effect is performed twice (when the timer is set to 2 times), the player's expectation for a big win in response to the first timer activation and the second time. It means that there is no difference between the expectation of the big win and the expectation of the timer activation. Specifically, from the player's point of view, the player's expectation for a big win for the first timer activation and the player's expectation for a big win for the second timer activation are the same. It turns out that. In other words, there is no difference between the first timer effect and the second timer effect (first timer=second timer).

With such a configuration, it is possible to widen the range of effects and improve the interest of the game without raising or lowering the player's tension uselessly.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the timer production is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and the timer production performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and other conditions Regarding both the timer effect performed in the (time-saving game state), the degree of expectation for the big win differs depending on whether or not the timer effect is executed and the execution pattern (the degree of expectation for the big win is different under all conditions). The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the timer performance performed under certain conditions and the timer performance performed under other conditions share the same level of expectation for big wins depending on whether or not execution is performed and the execution pattern (expectations for big wins under all conditions It may be the same degree), or it may be varied (such as the same jackpot expectation under certain conditions and different jackpot expectations under other conditions).

(Example of stock production)
Next, an example of the stock effect will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the "stock effect" is an effect that suggests the occurrence of any one of a plurality of events that make players expect that a jackpot game will be executed in the process of executing the variable effect. In the stock effect of the present embodiment, the color change of the variable icon (the variable icon change effect) is executed when the stock is released.

More specifically, the stock effect is an effect that indicates that a predetermined event will occur during the variable effect by displaying the stock icon 225 in the effect display area 70 . In the timer effect, the timing at which the suggested event occurs is suggested by subtracting the timer time, whereas in the stock effect, the timing at which the suggested event occurs is not suggested.

The stock effect of the present embodiment is performed during SP reach or SPSP reach. Note that the stock effect is not limited to being performed during the SPSP reach or during the SPSP reach, and may be performed at other timings such as during pseudo fluctuations.

FIG. 86 shows an example of a stock effect. The example of FIG. 86 shows the case where there is one stock icon 225 . Also, the example of FIG. 86 shows a case where the variation icon TI changes from a white icon to a red icon due to the stock effect.

First, the start of SP reach will be explained. FIG. 86(a) shows an example of an image displayed at the start of SP reach. As shown in FIG. 86(a), at the start of SP reach or SPSP reach, a title image 224 of SP reach or SPSP reach is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 86(b), a stock icon 225 is displayed at a predetermined position of the effect display area 70 (lower right side of the effect display area 70 in the example of FIG. 86(b)) after a predetermined period of time from the start of fluctuation. In the vicinity of the stock icon 225, an image indicating that the stock icon 225 is on standby (character image of "STANDBY" in the example of FIG. 86) is displayed.

Note that the stock icon 225 is displayed with movement. Specifically, the stock icon 225 is displayed so as to fluctuate over the period from its appearance to its activation. As a result, the game machine 1 can make the player feel that some event will occur by activating the stock icon 225, and increase the player's sense of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 86(c), when the end timing of the standby time of the stock icon 225 approaches, a countdown display is performed near the stock icon 225. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 86(d), when the standby time of the stock icon 225 ends and the stock icon 225 is activated, an effect is performed such that the stock icon 225 covers the variation icon TI, and the stock icon 225 is activated. .

As shown in FIG. 86(e), when the stock icon 225 is activated, the color of the variation icon TI is changed. More specifically, the variation icon TI (white icon in the example of FIG. 86(c)) that was displayed before the stock icon 225 was activated is changed to the image after the icon color change (the example of FIG. 86(e) is updated to a red icon).

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of patterns are provided for execution patterns of the stock effect. Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one stock icon 225 is displayed for the standby time A during one change, and one stock icon 225 is displayed on standby during one change. There are patterns that are displayed over time B, and there are cases where two stock icons 225 are displayed during one variation. It should be noted that the length of the standby time is such that standby time A<waiting time B.

Here, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, when a plurality of stock icons 225 are displayed (when there are a plurality of stock icons), the plurality of stock icons 225 appear and are displayed at the same time. Also, after the first stock icon 225 is activated, the second stock icon 225 is activated (appears at the same time, activated with a time lag).

In addition, when multiple stock icons are displayed, multiple stock icons may appear at the same time and be activated with a time difference (appear at the same time, activate at a time difference), or even if they are activated at the same time. Good (appears at the same time, activates at the same time). Also, when multiple stock icons are displayed, multiple stock icons will appear at different times (whether before or after the previous stock icon is activated) and will be activated at different times. There may be (appear with a time difference, activate with a time difference), or they may be activated at the same time (appear with a time difference, activate with a time difference).

Also, as described above, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, the expected degree of jackpot is increased in the order of 1 stock icon (shorter waiting time A) < 1 stock icon (longer waiting time B) < 2 stock icons. getting higher.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the stock effect may be configured differently from the present embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, the stock icon 225 is displayed with movement, but the stock icon 225 may be displayed without movement.

Furthermore, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, a common execution pattern (waiting time and the number of stock icons) is shown as an example, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the contents and types of execution patterns may be different between the stock effect performed under certain conditions and the stock effect performed under other conditions (under certain conditions 1 kind, under other conditions 3 kinds, etc.).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the stock effect is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. The stock effect may be executed under certain conditions, and the stock effect may not be executed under other conditions.

Furthermore, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on whether or not the stock effect is performed and the execution pattern. the same degree of expectation), or may suggest the development of other effects depending on the presence or absence of execution or the execution pattern (indirectly differ in the degree of expectation for a big win).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the stock effect is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and the stock effect performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and other conditions For both the stock effect performed in (time-saving game state), the execution of the stock effect and the execution pattern have the same jackpot expectations (the jackpot expectations are different in common under all conditions). Although shown, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the stock effect performed under certain conditions and the stock effect performed under other conditions share the same jackpot expectation level depending on whether or not execution is performed and the execution pattern (common under all conditions). ), or may vary (e.g., the expectation of jackpot is the same under certain conditions, and the expectation of jackpot is different under other conditions).

(Example of operation instruction effect and cut-in display)
Next, an example of an effect when a cut-in display is performed as an object of the operation instruction effect will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, "cut-in" means that the cut-in image 240 is displayed and the display color of the cut-in image 240 suggests the degree of expectation for the big win.

As described above, the "operation instruction effect" displays the operation instruction image 230 indicating the device (for example, the effect button 35) that the player can operate, and prompts the player to operate the device (for example, the effect button 35). , “Push!”, “PUSH”, “Hit repeatedly!”, etc.). During the operation instruction rendering, an image (effective period indication image 231 representing a meter or the like) indicating a period (effective period) for accepting an operation to the device (effect button 35) is displayed together with the operation instruction image 230. FIG.

In the operation instruction effect of the present embodiment, an image showing the effect button 35 (see FIG. 87(a)) is displayed together with a character image of "PUSH" indicating that the effect button 35 is pressed as the operation instruction image 230. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effects such as the display of the cut-in image 240 and the winning/losing notification effect are performed as the effect (activation target effect) targeted for the operation instruction effect. Note that the example shown in FIG. 87 shows an example in which the cut-in image 240 is displayed by the operation instruction effect (the display of the cut-in image 240 is the effect to be activated).

As shown in FIG. 87(a), an operation instruction image 230 is displayed during the SP ready-to-win effect or at a predetermined timing during the SP ready-to-win effect (for example, the final stage of the SP ready-to-win effect). In addition to the operation instruction image 230, an effective period suggestion image 231 indicating the effective period is displayed. The validity period suggesting image 231 suggests the remaining time of the validity period, for example, by reducing the gauge as time elapses.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 87(a), the operation instruction image 230 shown as an example in this embodiment is displayed so as to sway vertically or horizontally (displayed with movement). More specifically, the operation instruction image 230 alternately alternates between a non-operating state indicating a state in which the effect button 35 is not operated and an operating state indicating a state in which the effect button 35 is operated. Displayed with a repeating animation action.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), after the operation instruction image 230 is displayed, the cut-in image 240 is displayed at a predetermined timing.

Here, when the non-auto button mode is set, the cut-in image 240 is displayed at the timing of the device operation or at the timing after the validity period has passed. More specifically, when the auto button mode is not set (when the non-auto button mode is set), if the device is not operated during the valid period, the cut-in image 240 is displayed after the valid period has passed. is displayed, and if the device is operated during the valid period, the cut-in image 240 is displayed at the timing of the device operation.

Further, as described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the button is operated when the mountain mode is set, when the river mode is set, and when the auto button mode is set. It is assumed that the timing of determining that

More specifically, when the auto button mode is set and the presentation mode A (mountain mode) is set, the timing Td1 after the start of the valid period (timing 1/3 of the valid period) ) activates the auto button (the cut-in image 240 is displayed). In addition, when the auto button mode is set and the effect mode B (river mode) is set, the auto button is activated at the timing Td2 after the start of the effective period (2/3 of the effective period). is activated (a cut-in image 240 is displayed).

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timing at which an effect (display of the cut-in image 240 in the present embodiment) that is the target of the operation instruction effect occurs differs depending on the determined mode. Specifically, when the mountain mode is set, the auto button is activated early, and when the river mode is set, the auto button is activated later.

As is clear from the above description, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the device operation is not performed, the activation target effect is performed at the timing after the valid period ends, and before the valid period ends. There is a case where the activation target effect is performed at the timing (when the activation target effect is performed at the timing of activating the auto button). Further, as is clear from the above description, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are cases where the activation target effect is performed at the timing when the device operation is performed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the activation target effect occurs differs depending on the activation timing of the auto button or whether or not the player operates the device. There is no difference in the degree (even if the timing is different, the expected degree of jackpot is the same). In addition, while there is no change in the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the timing at which the effect to be activated occurs, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the background color of the cut-in image 240 displayed in the effect to be activated.

As a result, the game machine 1 can increase the amusement of the game by diversifying the timing at which an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, such as cut-in display, occurs.

As shown in FIG. 87(c), the cut-in image 240 can display, for example, a character image, and the background of the cut-in image 240 can suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. As described above, the cut-in image 240 has a higher expectation for a big win in the order of green background<red background<gold background<. In addition, in the present embodiment, the cut-in image 240 is displayed without movement in the cut-in display.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and may have a configuration different from that of the present embodiment in terms of cut-in display and operation instruction presentation.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 87, the occurrence of a cut-in (the display of the cut-in image 240) was described as an effect to be activated. As shown in the example, it is possible to set a winning notification as an activation target effect, display a background image that suggests the gimmick fall, the degree of expectation of a big hit (display of the background image that suggests the degree of expectation), development to SP reach, etc. Various selections are possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the activation timing of the auto button is changed according to the mode selected by the player is shown, but the activation timing of the auto button is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the activation timing of the auto button may differ depending on the degree of expectation for the privilege, such as the degree of expectation for a big win or the development of an advantageous effect (for example, SP reach). For example, the auto button may be activated at a later timing when the expectation of a big win is high, and the auto button may be activated at an earlier timing when the expectation of a big win is low.

Furthermore, the timing of activating the auto button may be any timing during the effective period.

Also, in the operation instruction rendering of the present embodiment, an example in which the operation instruction image 230 is accompanied by movement has been shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the operation instruction image 230 may be an image that does not involve movement. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the cut-in image 240 is displayed without movement in the cut-in display, but the cut-in image 240 may be displayed with movement. good.

Furthermore, in the cut-in display of the present embodiment, a common execution pattern for both the cut-in display performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and the cut-in display performed under other conditions (time-saving gaming state) (Three types of cut-in patterns) are shown as an example, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the cut-in display performed under a certain condition and the cut-in display performed under another condition may differ in the content and type of the execution pattern. 2 under conditions, 3 under other conditions, etc.).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example in which the cut-in display is performed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state is shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this, The cut-in display may be performed under certain conditions, and cut-in display may not be performed under other conditions.

Furthermore, in the cut-in display of the present embodiment, an example was shown in which the expected degree of jackpot differs depending on the cut-in display execution pattern (green, red, gold pattern), but the execution of the cut-in display There is no difference in the expected level of jackpot depending on the pattern (the expected level of jackpot is the same), or the pattern suggests the development of other effects depending on the presence or absence of execution and the pattern of execution (the expected level of jackpot differs indirectly). good too.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the cut-in display is performed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and the cut-in display performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and other For both the cut-in display performed under the conditions (time-saving gaming state), the execution pattern of the cut-in display has a common jackpot expectation (the jackpot expectation is different under all conditions). , the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, there is no difference in the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the execution pattern between the cut-in display performed under certain conditions and the cut-in display performed under other conditions (under all conditions The same jackpot expectation may be used in common), or variations may be provided (eg, the jackpot expectation is the same under certain conditions, and the jackpot expectation is different under other conditions).

(An example of winning/losing notification effect)
Next, an example of the win/lose notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG.

The “hit-lose notification effect” is an effect for notifying the result of the big hit determination.

In the case of a jackpot, a winning/losing notification effect is performed in a mode of notifying the jackpot (jackpot mode). In addition, in the winning/losing notification effect of the jackpot mode, a success effect is performed.

In the case of a loss, a winning/losing notification effect is performed in a mode of notifying the loss (loss mode). In addition, in the winning/losing notification effect of the losing mode, a failure effect is performed.

Furthermore, as a mode of notifying a big win, there is a case where a performance is performed in a mode of reporting a loss, and then a recovery mode of winning/losing report performance (resurrection mode) in which a big win is reported is performed. In the hit-or-lose notification effect of the resurrection mode, a resurrection effect is performed.

More specifically, the hit-or-lose notification effect of the resurrection mode will be described in detail. After performing the effect (failure effect) indicating the losing mode, the resurrection or reversal effect is performed. Therefore, in the resurrection effect, an effect (failure effect, etc.) common to the effect indicating the failure mode is performed at least in part.

As shown in FIG. 88, at the final stage of the variable effect (immediately before the win/lose notification), an operation instruction effect is performed with the win/lose notification as the target effect to be activated. More specifically, at the end of the variable effect, the operation instruction image 230 is displayed, and the win/lose notification effect is performed by activating the button.

In the following example of the winning/losing notification effect, first, an example of the winning/losing notification effect of the jackpot mode will be described, followed by an example of the winning/losing notification effect of the losing mode, and then an example of the winning/losing notification effect of the revival mode will be described. .

(Example of winning notification effect of jackpot mode (non-resurrection))
FIG. 88 shows an example of the winning/losing notification effect in the big win mode (at the time of non-resurrection). As shown in FIG. 88(a), in the present embodiment, an operation instruction effect is performed in which the win/lose notification (success effect or failure effect) is the effect to be activated. In the operation instruction effect, an operation instruction image 230 is displayed to prompt the player to operate the device.

As for the operation instruction effect, since the activation timing and the configuration of the operation instruction image 230 and the like are the same as in the case where the aforementioned cut-in display is the effect to be activated, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), an operation instruction image 230 is displayed before the winning/losing notification.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), at a predetermined timing (timing of operating the device after expiration of the validity period, or timing of activating the auto button), an effect is performed to notify whether or not the jackpot is won. Also, in the case of a jackpot, a success effect (in the example of FIG. 88(b), a effect indicating that a woman and a man have successfully met) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 88(c), after the success effect, three effect symbols 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 88(c)) are displayed (jackpot mode). After being highlighted once, the three effect symbols 38 are stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the effect display area 70 (fixed stop). Note that when the win/lose notification effect for informing a big win is performed and the resurrection effect is not performed (at the time of non-resurrection), an eye-catching image 250, which will be described later, is not displayed.

(An example of a winning notification effect in a losing mode)
FIG. 89 shows an example of a winning/losing notification effect in a losing mode.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), an operation instruction image 230 is displayed before the winning/losing notification.

As shown in FIG. 89(b), at a predetermined timing (timing of operating the device after expiration of the validity period, or timing of activating the auto button), an effect is performed to notify whether or not the game is a big win. Further, in the case of a failure, a failure effect (in this embodiment, the effect that the effect display area 70 turns dark and the necklace is broken) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 89(c), after the failure effect, the third effect pattern 38 descends toward substantially the center of the effect display area 70 in a mode indicating a failure (loss mode such as 575).

As shown in FIG. 89(d), after the three production patterns 38 are displayed in the approximate center of the production display area 70 in a failing manner, the three production patterns 38 sway up and down while maintaining their positions (temporary stop). ).

As shown in FIG. 89(e), after the temporary stop is made, an eye-catching image 250 is displayed. Note that the eye-catching image 250 is an image indicating the end of the SP reach or the like, and can be displayed in substantially the entire area of the effect display area 70 as a background image accompanied by a predetermined character, model name, and the like. Note that the eye-catching image 250 is displayed without movement.

As shown in FIG. 89(f), after the eye-catching image 250 is displayed, the background image of the effect display area 70 returns to the normal background (for example, the background image corresponding to the effect mode), and the three effect patterns 38 are displayed as predetermined. The temporary stop is continued for the time (temporary stop time Te1).

As shown in FIG. 90(a), at the timing when the temporary stop time Te1 has passed, the production pattern 38 (temporarily stopped production pattern 38) indicating three losing modes that has been swaying is completely stopped. is displayed (fixed stop). Further, as shown in FIG. 90(b), after the fixed stop, the next variation is started.

(An example of the hit-or-lose notification effect of the resurrection mode)
FIG. 91 shows an example of a winning/losing notification effect in the resurrection mode.

Incidentally, as described above, in the win-lose notification effect of the resurrection mode, an effect common to the win-lose notification effect of the losing mode is performed at least in part. In the hit/lose notification effect of the resurrection mode of the present embodiment, from the display of the operation instruction image 230 (operation instruction effect) to the failure effect, the temporary stop of the effect pattern 38, and the display of the eye-catching image 250, the hit/lose notification effect of the loss mode is performed. A production that is common to the production is performed. In the following description of the win-lose notification effect of the resurrection mode, the description from the display of the operation instruction image 230 to the display of the third effect pattern 38 is omitted, and the three effect patterns 38 are temporarily stopped (losing eye temporary stop). I will explain the flow of

As shown in FIG. 91(a), after the failure effect, the three effect patterns 38 are displayed in the approximate center of the effect display area 70 in a failing manner, and then the three effect patterns 38 sway up and down while shifting their positions. Maintain (temporary stop for failure).

As shown in FIG. 91(b), an eye-catching image 250 is displayed after the temporary stop is performed.

As shown in FIG. 91(c), after the eye-catching image 250 is displayed, the background image of the effect display area 70 returns to the normal background (for example, the background image corresponding to the effect mode), and the three effect patterns 38 are displayed as predetermined. The temporary stop is continued for the time (temporary stop time Te2). In addition, the temporary stop time Te2 of the production pattern 38 in the case of the resurrection effect is longer than the temporary stop time Te1 of the production pattern 38 in the losing mode (temporary stop time Te1 in the case of loss <temporary stop in the case of revival) time Te2).

As shown in FIG. 91(d), after the temporary stop, the three performance symbols 38 start scrolling again. Also, in the effect display area 70, a resurrection effect (in the example of FIG. 91(d), a effect as if the broken necklace is restored and time goes backwards) is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 91(e), a success effect is performed after the resurrection effect.

As shown in FIG. 91(f), after the resurrection effect and the success effect, three effect patterns 38 (the effect pattern 38 of the jackpot mode) showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 91(f)) are highlighted. is displayed in a completely stopped state (determined stop).

In this way, in the resurrection mode, after the three production patterns 38 indicate the losing mode (see FIG. 91(a)), the eye-catching image 250 is displayed (see FIG. 91(b)). Further, after the eye-catching image 250 is displayed, the three production patterns 38 continue to temporarily stop swaying up and down over the temporary stop time Te2 (see FIG. 91(c)), and then the production patterns 38 are scrolled again. (changed again), after that, the production pattern 38 is displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot mode (fixed stop).

Further, as described above, the temporary stop time Te2 of the effect symbol 38 in the recovery mode is longer than the temporary stop time Te1 of the effect symbol 38 in the losing mode (temporary stop time Te1<temporary stop time Te2). In other words, when the resurrection effect is performed (in the case of a big win), the time from the display of the eye-catching image 250 to the final stop of the effect pattern 38 is longer than in the case of a loss. As a result, the game machine 1 can make the player expect a resurrection and a big win even when a loss is notified.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the winning/losing notification effect may be configured differently from that of this embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, the eye-catching image 250 is displayed as an animation image that does not involve movement. good.

In addition, although an example in which an operation instruction effect is performed before the win-lose notification effect of the present embodiment has been shown, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and an operation instruction effect is performed before the win-lose notification effect. may not be performed.

(Example of production during jackpot game)
Next, an example of an effect during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends, an image showing the type of the jackpot game (in the example shown in FIG. 92(a), the character "BIG BONUS" indicating that it is a 10R jackpot game image) is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(b), in the effect display area 70, a hitting-to-right notification image 260 suggesting hitting to the right is displayed.

As shown in Figure 92 (c), after the stop time of the first special symbol is over, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 provided in the right game area, the first round game of the first jackpot game is started. be. In addition, a round effect image is displayed, and a round number image 262 indicating the number of rounds (number of continuations) is displayed on the upper left of the screen in the effect display area 70 . Furthermore, in the upper right of the effect display area 70, a hitting-to-right notification image 260 suggesting hitting to the right is displayed.

(An example of the production during the time-saving game state)
Next, the production during the time-saving game state performed by the gaming machine 1 (during the low-probability time-saving game state and during the high-probability time-saving game state) will be described. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is in both the normal gaming state (during the low probability non-time-saving gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state (during the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high probability gaming state), the icon A look-ahead effect such as an appearance effect, a winning flash effect, and an icon change effect (icon color change) can be executed.

Further, as described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is in the normal gaming state (during the low probability non-time-saving gaming state) and during the time-saving gaming state (during the low-probability short-time gaming state and high probability short-time gaming state) both , it is possible to execute effects during fluctuations such as actions at the start of fluctuations, advance notice of lines, and pseudo-continuations.

(Example of icon appearance effect during time saving game state)
First, an example of the icon appearance effect performed during the time saving game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. FIG.

Note that the holding icon HI and the variable icon TI are always displayed with a rotating movement even during the time-saving game state, as in the normal game state. In the following description of each effect example, description of the movement of the pending icon HI and the variable icon TI will be omitted, but it is assumed that they are always displayed with movement (as periodic animation).

As described above, in this embodiment, three patterns of normal display, delayed display, and re-display are provided for the appearance mode of the pending icon HI. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in both the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the execution pattern (normal display, delayed display, and re-display) and execution mode (appearance timing and appearance of the pending icon HI) method) are common.

Hereinafter, each execution pattern of the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state and these modes will be described with reference to the drawings.

In FIGS. 93 to 95, as an example, when the number of second reservations is "2" (U2=2), the game ball Q wins (enters) the second starting port 15, and the number of second reservations is When it becomes "3" (U2=3), the mode of appearance of the pending icon HI, the mode of updating the second pending number display area 74b, the mode of the winning sound, and the timing of these are shown.

(Example of normal display)
First, with reference to FIG. 93, an example of normal display in the icon appearance effect during the time saving game state will be described. FIG. 93 shows an example of normal display in the icon appearance effect during the time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), when the second pending number is "2", "2" is displayed in the second pending number display area 74b, and the second pending icon display area 72b has two pending Icon HI is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 93(b), when the game ball Q enters the second starting port 15 (winning) and the second reserved number becomes "3", the second reserved number display area 74b is displayed at the time of winning TMa1. The display is updated from '2' to '3', and a winning sound (in the example of FIG. 93, a popping sound) is output from the audio output device 32. Also, the third pending icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the winning time TMa1. The example of FIG. 93(b) shows an example in which the pending icon HI appears above the second pending icon display area 72b. The suspended icon HI that has appeared appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 93(b)) in the second suspended icon display area 72b.

In this way, in the icon appearance effect during the time saving game state, in the case of normal display, at the time of winning TMa1 (immediately after winning), the appearance (display) of the pending icon HI and the pending number display area 74 (number pending) ), and the winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 93(c), after the pending icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding region (the third region R3 in the example of FIG. 93(b)) in the second pending icon display region 72b. That is, when the appearance operation of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed in each of the first region R1, the second region R2, and the third region R3, and a total of three pending icons HI are displayed. Become. Thus, even in the icon appearance effect during the time-saving gaming state, the pending icon HI is displayed in the right-side pending icon display area 72 (second pending icon display area 72b). It is displayed in the same display mode as the icon appearance effect.

Note that, as described above, the hold icon HI is displayed with movement. More specifically, the hold icon HI is periodically moved to rotate (periodic animation). In addition, when a plurality of pending icons HI are displayed, the plurality of pending icons HI are displayed with movement so as to be synchronized.

Further, while the pending icon HI is displayed as an animation accompanied by motion, the pending number (number pending) displayed in the pending number display area 74 is not accompanied by motion. To explain in more detail, the number reserve does not change its display unless the condition for increasing or decreasing the number of reserves (new winning or completion of the reserve) is established. In addition, the number of reservations (number reservation) displayed in the number of reservations display area 74 maintains the displayed state (continues to be displayed) even when other effects such as SP reach effects are performed. .

(Example of delay display)
Next, an example of the delay display in the icon appearance effect during the time saving game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 shows an example of the case where delay display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), when the second pending number is "2", "2" is displayed in the second pending number display area 74b, and the second pending icon display area 72b has two pending Icon HI is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 94(b), when the game ball Q wins the second starting port 15 and the first reserved number becomes "3", the second reserved number display area 74b displays "2" at the winning time TMa1. ” is updated to “3”, and a prize-winning sound (in the example of FIG. 94, a “pop” sound) is output. In the case of the delayed display, the winning sound TMa1 is output at the time of winning, while the pending icon HI does not appear (is not appearing).

As shown in FIG. 94(c), the third pending icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at a timing TMa2 after a time Ta2 (two seconds in this embodiment) from the winning time TMa1. That is, in the delayed display, the pending icon HI appears later than in the normal display. This embodiment shows an example in which the pending icon HI appears above the second pending icon display area 72b. The suspended icon HI that has appeared appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 94(c)) in the second suspended icon display area 72b.

As shown in FIG. 94(d), after the pending icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 94(d)) in the second pending icon display area 72b. That is, when the appearance operation of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed in each of the first region R1, the second region R2, and the third region R3, and a total of three pending icons HI are displayed. Become.

In this way, even when the delayed display is performed in the icon appearance effect during the time saving game state (when the delay occurs), the mode is the same as when the delay display is performed in the icon appearance effect during the non-time saving game state. . That is, in the delayed display, when the prize is won (immediately after winning), the pending number display area 74 (number pending) is updated to increase and the winning sound is output. It is performed at timing TMa2 after a predetermined time has elapsed from TMa1. Explained from the opposite point of view, in the gaming machine 1, even if the display (appearance) of the hold icon HI is delayed, the output of the winning sound and the update timing of increasing the number hold are constant.

(Example of re-display)
Next, an example of re-display in the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 shows an example of redisplay.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the second pending number is "2", "2" is displayed in the second pending number display area 74b, and the second pending icon display area 72b has two pending Icon HI is displayed

As shown in FIG. 95(b), when the game ball Q wins the second starting port 15 and the second reserved number becomes "3", the second reserved number display area 74b displays "2" at the winning time TMa1. ” is updated to “3”, and a prize-winning sound (in the example of FIG. 95, a “pop” sound) is output. Also, the third pending icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the winning time TMa1. The suspended icon HI that has appeared appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 95(b)) of the second suspended icon display area 72b.

As shown in FIG. 95(c), after the pending icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 95(c)) of the second pending icon display area 72b. That is, when the first appearance operation of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed in each of the first region R1, the second region R2, and the third region R3, and a total of three pending icons HI are displayed. state.

As shown in FIG. 95(d), the suspended icon HI that has appeared disappears (the suspended icon HI disappears) after a time Ta1 (for example, 1 second) from the winning time TMa1. FIG. 95(d) shows an example in which an effect is performed such that the hold icon HI pops and disappears. Note that even if the pending icon HI is hidden (disappears), the second pending number display area 74b is kept updated (display of "3" indicating that U2=3).

As shown in FIG. 95(e), the hidden pending icon HI reappears in the effect display area 70 at a timing TMa2 after a time Ta2 (two seconds in this embodiment) from the winning time TMa1. The suspended icon HI that has appeared appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 95(e)) of the second suspended icon display area 72b.

As shown in FIG. 95(f), the reappearing pending icon HI is displayed in the corresponding area (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 95(f)) of the second pending icon display area 72b. That is, when the second appearance operation of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed in each of the first region R1, the second region R2, and the third region R3, and a total of three pending icons HI are displayed. state.

As described above, when re-display is performed in the icon appearance effect in the time-saving game state, it is in the same mode as when re-display is performed in the icon appearance effect in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). . That is, in the redisplay, at TMa1 at the time of winning (immediately after winning), the display (appearance) of the pending icon HI, the increase update of the pending number in the pending number display area 74 (number pending), and the output of the winning sound. At the same time, the hold icon HI is displayed (appears) again at a timing TMa2 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the winning time TMa1. From the opposite point of view, it can be said that one hold icon HI is displayed twice in the redisplay. Also, even in the case of re-display, the output of the winning sound and the increment update of the number hold are performed once at a fixed timing (once at the same timing as the normal display).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, even in the icon appearance effect during the time saving game state (icon appearance effect performed during the time saving game state), in the normal display, the pending icon HI is displayed by appearing at the time of winning, while the delayed display is performed. In , the suspended icon is displayed (appears) with a delay from the normal display, and in the redisplay, the suspended icon is displayed (appears) twice.

Here, as described above, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the execution pattern of icon appearance effects (whether normal display, delayed display, or re-display). Specifically, in the icon appearance effect during the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high in the order of normal display<delayed display<redisplay.

On the other hand, in the icon appearance effect during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, normal display<delayed display=re-display jackpot expectation. That is, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the pending icon HI appears after a predetermined time from the winning than when the pending icon HI appears at the time of winning (the later the pending icon HI appears Expectations are high). As a result, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can increase the player's interest in the appearance timing of the pending icon HI, and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the icon appearance effect during the high probability time-saving game state, normal display = delay display <re-display jackpot expectation. That is, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the pending icon HI appears twice than when the pending icon HI appears once for one winning. As a result, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can increase the player's interest in the number of appearances of the pending icon HI and improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, as described above, the gaming machine of the present invention can also set the degree of expectation for a big win so that normal display=delayed display=re-display (see FIG. 41(d)). Specifically, in the icon appearance effect that is performed under predetermined conditions (for example, high-probability time-saving gaming state), depending on whether it is normal display, delayed display, or re-display (depending on the execution pattern), It may be assumed that there is no difference in the degree of expectation for a big win (the degree of expectation for a big win is the same). In the modified example of the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the high-probability time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. (Regardless of whether it is a big hit or a loss, normal display is 33%, delayed display is 33%, and re-display is determined by 33%). Therefore, in the modified example of the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the high-probability time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. None.

In this way, in the modified icon appearance effect of the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the high-probability time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. ). That is, in the modified example of the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the high-probability time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 41(d), depending on when the pending icon HI appears ), there is no difference in the degree of expectation for a big win, and furthermore, there is no difference in the degree of expectation for a big win depending on how many times the pending icon HI appears for one winning. From another point of view, during the high-probability time-saving gaming state, even if a certain pending icon HI appears as a red icon with a delay (even in the case of delayed display), even if it appears as a red icon at the time of winning (normal display) ), even if the pending icon HI appears multiple times, in any case, it only suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit as a red icon, and whether it appears late or at the time of winning, or how many times There is no difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit depending on whether or not it appears. As a result, the game machine 1 can improve the interest of the game by giving unexpectedness and sharpness without wastefully raising and lowering the tension of the player in the game in the high-probability game state.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the icon appearance effect that is performed when the time-saving game state and the low-probability game state (low-probability time-saving game state), delayed display or re-display is determined according to the fluctuation effect pattern. different probabilities.

For example, in the present embodiment, in the icon appearance effect during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the delay display is determined at a rate of 15% when SP reach is performed, whereas the delay display is performed when SPSP reach is performed. is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, when the same SP reach is performed, whether it is a big hit or a loss, the delayed display is determined at a rate of 15%. In addition, in the icon appearance effect during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, as described above, the degree of expectation for development to SP reach or higher is normally displayed <delayed = redisplayed.

In this way, in the icon appearance effect during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, depending on the execution pattern (regarding whether it is normal display, delayed display, or re-display), development to other effects (high expectations for big hits) The possibility of is increasing, indirectly suggesting the degree of expectation for the jackpot (the degree of expectation for the jackpot is indirectly different). That is, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, depending on when the pending icon HI appears (depending on whether it appears at the time of winning or appears with a delay), if the pending icon appears late (delayed display) or the pending icon When appears twice (redisplay), the possibility of developing into SP reach or the like increases.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 gives the player a sense of incongruity and sharpness to the game, and provides more advanced guessing elements (guessing information) when the player guesses whether or not a big win has been awarded. be able to. That is, even if the display color of the pending icon HI is not so high as to expect a big hit (for example, if it is a white icon or a blue icon), if a delay display etc. is performed, development to SP reach etc. It is possible to heighten expectations for future performances.

(A prize flash effect that is triggered by winning a prize at the second start gate)
Next, a winning flash effect (a winning flash effect during the time-saving game state) that is triggered by the winning of the second starting port 15 will be described.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning flash effect is performed even during the time saving game state with the same configuration as the winning flash effect during the normal game state (during the non-time saving game state). Also, the win flash effect during the time saving game state is similar to the win win flash effect during the non-time saving game state in terms of mode and execution pattern.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the winning flash effect during the time saving game state may be configured differently from the winning flash effect during the normal game state. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention performs a winning flash effect for either winning to the first start port 14 or winning to the second start port 15 (during either the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state) On the other hand, the winning flash effect may not be performed.

In addition, when the winning flash effect is performed during the time-saving game state, as described in the explanation of the winning flash effect during the non-time-saving game state, the specific sound may be output with a delay (delay pattern). However, a specific sound may be output a plurality of times (re-execution pattern), or a promotion pattern may be provided.

Furthermore, when a delay pattern is provided for the winning flash performance triggered by the winning to the second starting port 15, the timing of outputting the specific sound with a delay is set to the winning triggered by the winning to the first starting port 14.例文帳に追加The timing may be different from the timing in the delay pattern of the flash effect (for example, when the first start opening 14 is won and a delay occurs, the specific sound is output two seconds later, whereas the second start opening If there is a delay after winning 15, a specific sound will be output after one second, etc.).

Further, regarding the winning flash effect during the time-saving game state, the degree of expectation for the big win may be the same depending on whether or not it is executed and the execution pattern, or the degree of expectation for the big win may be indirectly different. For example, if white light is emitted when a prize is won, there is no difference in the degree of expectation for the big win due to the execution of the prize flash effect itself compared to when it is not executed, but the possibility that the icon color will change after that is increased. For example, the possibility of occurrence of other effects (effects with high expectations for big wins) may be increased.

(About the icon change effect during the time saving game state)
Next, the icon color change (icon change effect during the time-saving game state) relating to the second hold will be described.

Each pending icon HI related to the second pending shifts from the second pending icon display area 72b toward the variable icon display area 73 each time one variation is completed. For example, the pending icon HI displayed in the first region R1 is shifted to the variable icon display region 73 and displayed as the variable icon TI, and the pending icon HI displayed in the second region R2 is shifted to the first region R1. displayed with a shift to . Also, the hold icon HI displayed in the third area R3 is shifted to the second area R2 and displayed.

Further, when the color change of the hold icon HI related to the second hold is performed, it is performed at the time of shift, similarly to the hold icon HI related to the first hold. That is, the color change of the hold icon HI related to the second hold is performed only at the timing of the shift.

(Regarding the variation effect of the second special symbol)
Next, the variable performance of the second special symbol (variable performance during the time-saving game state) will be described.

At the start of variation of the second special symbol (at the start of variation during the time-saving gaming state), in the same way as at the start of variation of the first special symbol (at the start of variation during the non-time-saving gaming state), the second pending number display area The pending number displayed in 74b is updated by subtracting "1". It should be noted that the timing and manner of updating the number of reservations (number reservation) in the second number of reservations display area 74b is the same as the timing and manner of updating the number of reservations in the first number of reservations display area 74a.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is, in both the variable performance during the non-time-saving gaming state and the variable performance during the time-saving gaming state, the action at the start of the fluctuation, the dialogue notice, the pseudo-continuation, the timer production, the stock production, Cut-in display, effect during fluctuation such as winning/losing notification effect are executed. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation start action, dialogue notice, pseudo-continuation, timer production, stock production, cut-in display, winning/losing notification production, etc. Some or all of these may not be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in both the variable performance during the non-time-saving gaming state and the variable performance during the time-saving gaming state, it is common for each variable performance (execution mode and jackpot expectation). Therefore, in the following description, the detailed description of the effect during variation (the effect during variation of the second special symbol) during the time saving game state is omitted.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, during the fluctuation production performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (fluctuation production during non-time-saving game) and during the fluctuation production performed during the fluctuation of the second special symbol (time-saving game state Although an example has been shown in which the fluctuation production) is common (execution mode and jackpot expectation), the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment.

For example, pseudo-continuation is performed during fluctuations under certain conditions (such as non-time-saving gaming states and low-probability gaming states), while other conditions (such as time-saving gaming states and high-probability gaming states) are changing. The number of types of effects during fluctuation under certain conditions, such as no pseudo-continuation, may be different from the number of types of effects during fluctuation under other conditions.

Also, the number of types of effects performed under certain conditions may differ from the number of types of effects performed under other conditions (the types of effects performed may differ depending on the conditions). For example, in the normal game state (normal time), "hold icon display", "scroll", "pseudo continuous", "timer effect", "stock effect", "operation instruction effect (decision effect)", " While providing seven types of winning and losing notification production (including resurrection mode), during the high probability time-saving gaming state (high probability), fewer types than these may be performed, or many types may be performed It may be

In addition, in one type of effect, the number of types of effects provided with multiple timings to be executed (for example, icon appearance effects provided with multiple timings for the appearance of a pending icon) varies under certain conditions and under other conditions. (For example, during non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state, during high-probability gaming state and low-probability gaming state, etc.) may be different.

For example, a delayed display is provided for the icon appearance effect, and a delay pattern is provided for the prize flash effect (when the icon appearance effect and the prize flash effect are provided as effects that have multiple timings to be executed), and the icon appearance effect and the winning flash effect are provided at normal times. Winning flash effect is performed (normally, there are two types of icon appearance effect and winning flash effect), and during the time saving game state, the icon appearance effect is performed and the winning flash effect is not performed (1 type of icon appearance effect during the time saving game state) ).

(Types of errors and detection and cancellation conditions for each error)
Next, a plurality of types of errors (in other words, abnormalities) that can occur in the gaming machine 1 will be listed and described with reference to FIG.

It should be noted that, as described above, in this specification, strictly speaking, "occurrence of an error" means when an irregular event defined as an error occurs, such as an event such as power restoration or an abnormal winning frequency. , can be understood to mean that the occurrence of the irregular event is detected.

For example, the event "recovery of power supply" is not an error in the gaming machine 1 itself, but the state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 so as to be used by the player's game is a normal state (in other words, a normal state). state), the phenomenon in which the power of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state can be said to be a kind of abnormality (error).

It should be noted that the errors shown in FIG. 96 are only some of the possible errors and detectable errors, and there are various other errors. The gaming machine 1 can detect whether or not various errors (errors that can occur in the gaming machine 1) including the one shown in FIG. 96 have occurred.

In the following explanation, regarding any error, the transition from the state in which the error has occurred to the state in which the error has not occurred is described as "error resolution" or "error cancellation". .

Details of each error, detection conditions, and the like will be described below with reference to FIG.

(1. RAM clear)
A RAM clear is detected contingent upon detection of a RAM clear operation. Specifically, the main control board 110, on the condition that the gaming machine 1 is switched from the power OFF state to the power ON state while the RAM clear switch 111a is ON (RAM clearing operation is performed), Detect RAM clear. Since the RAM clear is not an "error (abnormality)" in the strict sense, the event is resolved when the main control board 110 detects it.

The "RAM clearing operation" is an operation in which the power is turned on while the administrator or the like presses the RAM clearing switch 111a (while the RAM clearing switch 111a is ON).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game machine 1 without the concept of setting change is taken as an example. is on the condition that the game machine 1 is switched from the power OFF state to the power ON state without the setting change mode activation operation (while the setting key is OFF) and with the RAM clear switch ON. can be detected.

(2. Power restoration)
Power restoration is detected contingent upon detection of a power restoration operation. Specifically, the main control board 110 turns off the power of the game machine 1 without turning on the RAM clear switch 111a (when the RAM clear switch 111a is turned off) when recovering from an unexpected power failure or the like. Power restoration is detected on the condition that the state is switched to the power ON state (power restoration operation is performed). Note that the restoration of the power supply is not an "error (abnormality)" in the strict sense, so the event is resolved when the main control board 110 detects it.

Note that the "power recovery operation" is an operation by an administrator or the like to turn on the power while the RAM clear switch 111a is in the OFF state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game machine 1 without the concept of setting change is taken as an example. , the game machine 1 is switched from the power OFF state to the power ON state without the setting change mode activation operation (while the setting key is OFF) and with the RAM clear switch OFF. can be detected.

(3. Abnormal Winning Error)
An abnormal winning error occurs when the game ball detection switch continues to detect for a certain period of time (eg, 1 second), or when the game ball detection switch detects a predetermined number or more of game balls within a predetermined period of time (eg, 3 in 0.5 seconds). In addition, the main control board 110 cancels the event by the abnormal winning error flag clearing process at the time of power restoration or RAM clearing.

In this embodiment, the game ball detection switch for detecting an abnormal winning error will be described as an example of using the large winning opening detection switch 16a. (For example, the first start opening detection switch 14a, the second start opening detection switch 15a, the general winning opening detection switch 12a, etc.), or a plurality of switches such as the big winning opening detection switch 16a and other switches. may be targeted.

Further, conditions such as the detection time of the game ball detection switch and the number of game balls when detecting an abnormal winning error are not limited to the present embodiment, and can be selected variously.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the abnormal winning error is cleared by the abnormal winning error flag clearing process at the time of power restoration or at the time of RAM clearing, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. . For example, the abnormal prize winning error may be canceled by executing RAM clearing, but may not be canceled by power restoration.

(4. Magnetic detection error)
A magnetic detection error is detected when the magnetic sensor 17 detects magnetism for a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms). Specifically, the main control board 110 detects a magnetic detection error when the magnetic sensor 17 is continuously outputting an ON signal, such as when an abnormal magnetism (magnetic field) is applied to the game machine 1. detect. Further, the main control board 110 cancels the event by executing the magnetic detection error flag clearing process when the power is restored or when the RAM is cleared.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the magnetic detection error is cleared by the magnetic detection error flag clearing process at the time of power restoration or RAM clearing, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. . For example, the magnetic detection error may be canceled by executing RAM clear, but may not be canceled by power restoration.

(5. Winning frequency error)
The winning frequency abnormality error is detected when the number of winnings within the reference time is equal to or greater than the threshold and reaches a specified number of times. Specifically, the main control board 110, in the low base state (regardless of whether it is in the non-time-saving gaming state or in the high-probability gaming state), the specified number for the reference number of shots When the game ball has won the first start port 14 (for example, when it is detected that 20 game balls have entered the first start port 14 during 100 shots), the winning frequency abnormality count number X "1" is updated. It does not matter whether the winning frequency abnormality count number X is updated by performing addition control or subtraction control of the counter value. Further, when it is determined that the winning frequency abnormality count number X has reached 5 (X≧5), the main control board 110 detects a winning frequency abnormality error. The number of shots of game balls is detected by an out-ball detection switch 11a. In addition, the main control board 110 cancels the event by executing the winning frequency abnormality error flag clearing process when the power is restored or when the RAM is cleared.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the winning frequency abnormality error is cleared by the winning frequency abnormality error flag clearing process when the power is restored or when the RAM is cleared. Not limited. For example, the winning frequency abnormality error may be canceled by executing RAM clearing, but may not be canceled by power restoration.

(6. Door open error)
A door open error is detected by detecting the OFF state of the door open switch 133 (the state indicating that the glass frame 50 is open). Specifically, the main control board 110 detects a door open error when the glass frame 50 is opened with respect to the outer frame 60 (when the door open switch 133 is OFF). The door open switch 133 is a switch for detecting whether the glass frame 50 is in a closed state or an open state. When the glass frame 50 is in the closed state, the door open switch 133 outputs an ON signal and the glass frame 50 is opened. When in the state, it outputs an OFF signal. Further, when the main control board 110 detects the ON state of the door opening switch, it cancels the event.

(7. Switch unconnected error)
A switch unconnected error is detected on the condition that a switch unconnected state is detected. Specifically, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of the switch disconnection error when the actual connection of the switch to be connected to the main control board 110 is defective (including complete disconnection). . Further, when the main control board 110 detects the switch connection state, it cancels the event.

(8. Plate full error)
A full-dish error is detected on the condition that the full-dish detection switch 136 is turned on. Specifically, the main control board 110 detects when the pan 40 is full. More specifically, the full tank detection switch 136 can detect whether or not the tray 40 is full, and outputs an ON signal when the tray 40 is full. Otherwise, it outputs an OFF signal. The main control board 110 detects a full-dish error when an ON signal is output from the full-dish detection switch 136 . Also, when the main control board 110 detects that the full-dish detection switch 136 is in the OFF state, it cancels the event.

In this embodiment, the tray 40 is provided as a storage tray for game balls, and the tray full tank detection switch 136 shows an example in which the tray 40 is full. The machine is not limited to this embodiment. For example, if a gaming machine is provided with an upper tray and a lower tray, a full tray error is detected on the condition that at least one of the upper tray and the lower tray is detected as being full. may

Thus, in the game machine 1, at least eight types of errors (1 ~8 errors) can occur.

Here, the abnormal prize winning error and the magnetism detection error are serious events that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned on and off or the RAM clear operation is performed (RAM clear, power restoration, etc.). In this specification, serious events (errors) such as RAM clearing, power recovery, abnormal prize winning errors, and magnetic detection errors are described as "serious events" or "serious errors". (See Figure 96).

Further, the door open error, the switch disconnection error, and the plate full error are minor events that can be resolved without clearing the RAM or turning on the power. Furthermore, the winning frequency abnormality error is a minor error compared to the abnormal winning error and the magnetic detection error. In addition, if a serious error such as an abnormal winning error or magnetic detection error occurs, a security signal will be output, but an abnormal winning frequency error, door open error, switch disconnection error, and plate full error will occur. security signal is not output. Therefore, in this specification, minor events (errors) such as winning frequency abnormal error, door open error, switch unconnected error, and plate full error are described as "minor events" or "minor errors". (See FIG. 96).

As will be described in detail later, when a serious error such as RAM clear occurs, a security signal, which will be described later, is output. Specifically, when a RAM clear, an abnormal prize winning error, or a magnetism detection error occurs, a security signal is output. On the other hand, no security signal is output even if a minor error such as a winning frequency error occurs.

(Notification mode of each error)
Next, the conditions for starting and ending notification of each error and the mode of error notification will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 shows notification start conditions, notification end conditions, and notification modes for each error.

As described above, in the description of this specification, the image display device 31 (effect display area 70), lamps such as the decorative lighting device 34, and the notification of an error (error event) performed by the audio output device 32 are collectively referred to as , may be described as "error notification".

Further, in the following description, among the decorative lighting devices 34, lamps used for error notification may be collectively referred to as "decorative lamps 37". In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the board illumination device 34a and the frame illumination device 34b are used as the decorative lamps 37 for error notification. It should be noted that the lamp used for error notification is not limited to the one in this embodiment, and can be selected in various ways.

In each error notification, the timing at which the effect control unit 120m starts error notification after the main control board 110 detects an error is a timing common to each error notification (fixed timing).

(1. Notification of RAM clear)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the sub CPU 120a starts RAM clear notification on condition that the RAM clear command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a ends the RAM clear notification when 120 seconds have passed since the start of the RAM clear notification (reception of the RAM clear command from the main control board 110).

As shown in FIG. 98 as an example, in the RAM clear notification, the image display device 31 displays an error notification dedicated image 300A (in the example of FIG. 98, an image including the characters "RAM clear") on the entire screen (entire area). is continued for 120 seconds. In addition, in the RAM clear notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are lit for 1 second each in R (red) → G (green) → B (blue), and each set of 3 seconds is set as one set, and the notification of the set is repeated for 120 seconds. executed. Furthermore, in the RAM clear notification, the voice (voice) of "RAM has been cleared" is output for 2 seconds, and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds. The notification of the set is repeated for 120 seconds.

In addition, in the RAM clearing notification (RAM clearing notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32, a warning effect sound (for example, dedicated BGM, etc.) different from the siren sound A at the time of power restoration notification, which will be described later, is output. may be Also, the voice output time for the RAM clear notification may be longer than the warning sound output time (voice output time>warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output may be the same time (voice output time). output time=warning sound effect output time). Furthermore, in the RAM clear notification by sound, voice output may be performed only once at the start of notification (for example, after voice output, only a warning effect sound is output, etc.). Furthermore, in the RAM clear notification by sound, only a warning sound effect may be output without voice output.

Further, the error notification dedicated image 300A in the RAM clear notification may not be displayed on the entire screen (entire area) of the image display device 31, and may be displayed on a part of the image display device 31. (See FIGS. 106(a) and (b)). That is, the RAM clear notification by image may be one in which another image (for example, normal effect) can be visually recognized on the image display device 31 . An example in which the error notification dedicated image 300A is displayed on a "part" of the image display device 31 (see FIG. 106) will be described later.

(2. Notification of power restoration)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 99, the sub CPU 120a starts power restoration notification on condition that the power restoration command is received. Note that the power restoration notification (display of the power restoration screen) by the image display device 31 ends on the condition that the next command is received regardless of whether 30 seconds have passed since the start of the error notification. And the power restoration notification by the voice output device 32 ends when both of the reception of the next command and the elapse of 30 seconds from the start of the error notification are satisfied. That is, the notification by sound and lamp continues for 30 seconds from the start of the error notification even if the next command is received before 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the error notification (30 seconds of notification is guaranteed).

As described above, the "next command" includes, for example, a variation start command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main CPU 110a, a variation stop command, a customer waiting state designation command, an opening designation command, and a round designation. These are commands that occur over time, such as commands, ending commands, etc. (except start-up winning commands).

As shown in FIG. 99, in the power recovery notification, the image display device 31 displays an error notification dedicated image 300B (an image including the characters "Power has been restored" in the example of FIG. 99) on the entire screen (entire area). is performed. In addition, in the power restoration notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are notified with all white lighting→all off for 1 second each and 2 seconds for 1 set. Furthermore, in the power recovery notification, a set of 5 seconds is set in which a voice saying "power is on" is output for 2 seconds and a warning effect sound (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds. is executed repeatedly.

In addition, in the power restoration notification (power restoration notification by sound) performed by the audio output device 32, a warning sound effect (for example, siren sound B) different from the warning sound effect at the time of RAM clearing notification may be output. good. In addition, the voice output time for the power recovery notification may be longer than the warning sound output time (voice output time > warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and warning sound output time may be the same (voice output time). output time=warning sound effect output time). Furthermore, in the power recovery notification by sound, the voice output may be performed only once at the start of the notification (for example, after the voice output, only the warning sound effect is output). Furthermore, in the power recovery notification by sound, only a warning sound effect may be output without voice output.

Further, the error notification dedicated image 300B in the power restoration notification may not be displayed on the entire screen (entire area) of the image display device 31, and may be displayed on a part of the image display device 31. (See FIGS. 106(a) and (b)). In other words, the image-based power recovery notification may be one in which another image (for example, a normal effect) can be visually recognized on the image display device 31 . An example in which the error notification dedicated image 300B is displayed on a "part" of the image display device 31 (see FIG. 106) will be described later.

(3. Notification of abnormal winning error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 100, the sub CPU 120a starts an abnormal winning error notification on condition that an abnormal winning error designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a terminates the abnormal prize winning error notification on the condition that the power is turned off.

More specifically, the termination condition of the abnormal prize winning error notification will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the abnormal prize winning error is resolved by clearing the abnormal prize winning error flag at the time of power restoration or RAM clearing. Therefore, the abnormal prize winning error is caused by turning on the power with the RAM clear switch 111a turned on after the power is turned off (whether the RAM clearing operation is performed), or by turning the power on with the RAM clear switch 111a turned off. is turned on (whether a power recovery operation is performed), the error is resolved when the power is turned on. That is, it can be said that the abnormal prize winning error ends when the power is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the abnormal prize winning error notification, the error notification dedicated image 300C (in the example of FIG. 100, the image including the characters “abnormal winning has been detected”) is displayed on the entire screen (entire area). is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Further, in the abnormal prize winning error notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are lit in red, and the operation is continued until the power is turned off. Furthermore, in the abnormal winning error notification, the voice of "abnormal winning has been detected" is output for 2 seconds, and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds. is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off.

In addition, in the abnormal prize winning error notification, the decoration lamp 37 may perform notification in a mode (blinking) that repeats lighting and extinguishing.

In addition, in the abnormal prize winning error notification (abnormal winning error notification by sound) performed by the audio output device 32, the warning effect sound may be the siren sound B or the dedicated siren sound C. Furthermore, the voice output time of the abnormal winning error notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time > warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output may be the same time ( Voice output time=warning sound effect output time). Furthermore, in the abnormal prize winning error notification by sound, the voice output may be performed only once at the start of the notification (for example, after the voice output, only the warning effect sound is output). Furthermore, in the abnormal prize winning error notification by sound, there may be no voice output, and only a warning sound effect may be output.

Further, the error notification dedicated image 300C in the abnormal prize winning error notification may not be displayed on the entire screen (entire area) of the image display device 31, and may be displayed on a part of the image display device 31. (See FIGS. 106(a) and (b)). That is, the abnormal prize winning error notification by image may be such that another image (for example, normal effect) can be visually recognized on the image display device 31 . An example in which the error notification dedicated image 300C is displayed on a "part" of the image display device 31 (see FIG. 106) will be described later.

(4. Notification of magnetic detection error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 101, the sub CPU 120a starts magnetic detection error notification on condition that the magnetic detection error designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a terminates the magnetic detection error notification on the condition that the power is turned off.

More specifically, the termination condition of the magnetic detection error notification will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the magnetic detection error is resolved by clearing the magnetic detection error flag when the power is restored or when the RAM is cleared. Therefore, the magnetic detection error is determined by whether the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 111a turned on (whether the RAM clear operation is performed) after the power is turned off, or when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 111a turned off. is turned on (whether a power recovery operation is performed), the error is resolved when the power is turned on. That is, it can be said that the magnetic detection error ends when the power is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the magnetic detection error notification, an error notification dedicated image 300D (in the example of FIG. 101, an image including the characters “magnetic detection”) is displayed on the entire screen (entire area) on the image display device 31. The notification continues until the power is turned off. Further, in the magnetic detection error notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are lit in red, and the operation continues until the power is turned off. Furthermore, in the magnetic detection error notification, the voice "magnetism detected" is output for 2 seconds, and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds. The notification is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off.

In addition, in the magnetic detection error notification, the decorative lamp 37 may perform notification in a mode (blinking) that repeats lighting and extinguishing.

In addition, in the magnetic detection error notification (magnetic detection error notification by sound) performed by the audio output device 32, the warning sound effect may be the siren sound B or the dedicated siren sound D may be used. Furthermore, the magnetic detection error notification voice output time may be longer than the warning sound output time (voice output time > warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and warning sound output may be the same time ( Voice output time=warning sound effect output time). Furthermore, in the magnetic detection error notification by sound, the voice output may be performed only once at the start of the notification (for example, after the voice output, only the warning sound effect is output). Furthermore, in the magnetic detection error notification by sound, there may be no voice output, and only a warning sound effect may be output.

Further, the error notification dedicated image 300D in the magnetic detection error notification may not be displayed on the entire screen (entire area) of the image display device 31, and may be displayed on a part of the image display device 31. (See FIGS. 106(a) and (b)). That is, the image-based magnetic detection error notification may be such that another image (for example, a normal effect) can be visually recognized on the image display device 31 . An example in which the error notification dedicated image 300D is displayed on "part" of the image display device 31 (see FIG. 106) will be described later.

(5. Notification of Winning Frequency Abnormal Error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 102, the sub CPU 120a starts notification of a winning frequency abnormality error on receipt of a winning frequency abnormality error designation command. Further, the sub CPU 120a terminates the notification of the winning frequency abnormality error on the condition that the power is turned off.

More specifically, the conditions for ending the notification of the abnormal winning frequency error are resolved by clearing the abnormal winning frequency error flag when the power is restored or when the RAM is cleared. Therefore, after the power failure occurs, the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 111a turned on (whether the RAM clear operation is performed), or the RAM clear switch 111a is turned off. Regardless of whether the power is turned on (whether a power recovery operation is performed), the error is resolved when the power is turned on. That is, it can be said that the winning frequency abnormality error ends when the power is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the winning frequency abnormality error notification, an error notification dedicated image 300E (in the example of FIG. 102, an image including the characters "winning frequency abnormality error") is displayed on the screen (image display device 31). The notification in the form displayed in part (for example, the upper right corner) continues until the power is turned off. Further, in the notification of the winning frequency abnormality error, all the decoration lamps 37 are continuously turned on and off in red (blinking in all red) until the power is turned off. Furthermore, in the winning frequency abnormality error notification, the voice of "Please call the staff" is output for 2 seconds, and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds. The notification is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off.

Incidentally, in the notification of the winning frequency abnormality error, the notification may be performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 37 is lit in full red.

In addition, in the winning frequency abnormality error notification (winning frequency abnormality error notification by sound) performed by the audio output device 32, the warning effect sound may be siren sounds B to D, or a dedicated siren sound E may be used. Furthermore, the voice output time of the winning frequency error notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time>warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output may be the same time. (Voice output time=warning sound effect output time). Furthermore, in the notification of the winning frequency abnormality error by sound, the voice output may be performed only once at the start of the notification (for example, after the voice output, only the warning effect sound is output). Furthermore, in the notification of the winning frequency abnormality error by sound, there may be no voice output, and only a warning sound effect may be output.

(6. Notification of door open error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 103, the sub CPU 120a starts the door opening error notification on the condition that the door opening start specifying command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a ends the door open error notification on the condition that the door open end designation command is received.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the door open error notification, an error notification dedicated image 300F (in the example of FIG. 103, an image including the characters "door open") is displayed on the image display device 31 as part of the screen (image display device 31). (For example, the notification in the form displayed in the upper right corner) is continuously executed until the completion of the door opening end notification (notification that the door is closed), which will be described later. Further, in the door open error notification, all the decoration lamps 37 are in a mode in which red lighting and extinguishing are repeated (all red blinking), and the door opening completion notification (notification that the door is closed) is continuously executed. be. Furthermore, in the door open error notification, one set of 5 seconds is set to output the voice "The door is open" for 2 seconds and output the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) for 3 seconds. The notification is repeatedly executed until the door opening end designation command is received.

When a door opening error is detected, a door/frame opening signal, which will be described later, is output as an external information signal.

When the sub CPU 120a receives the door opening end designation command, the sub CPU 120a generates a sound announcing that the door is closed (door opening end notification; in FIG. ) is output from the audio output device 32 . In addition, the display of the error notification image 300F and the notification by the decoration lamp 37 are continued until the door opening end notification is completed (audio output is completed).

Note that the door open error notification may be performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 37 is lit in full red.

Further, in the door opening error notification (door opening error notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32, the warning sound effect may be siren sounds B to E, or a dedicated siren sound F may be used. Furthermore, the voice output time of the door open error notification may be longer than the warning sound output time (voice output time > warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and warning sound output may be the same time ( Voice output time=warning sound effect output time). Furthermore, in door opening error notification by sound, voice output may be performed only once at the start of notification (for example, after voice output, only a warning sound effect is output). Furthermore, in the door opening error notification by sound, there may be no voice output, and only a warning sound effect may be output.

(7. Notification of switch disconnection error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 104, the sub CPU 120a starts the switch disconnection error notification on condition that the switch disconnection error start designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a terminates the switch disconnection error notification on condition that the switch disconnection error end designation command is received.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the switch disconnection error notification, an error notification dedicated image 300G (in the example of FIG. 104, an image including characters “switch disconnection error”) is displayed on the image display device 31 on the screen (image display device 31). The notification that is displayed in part (for example, the upper right corner) continues until the switch disconnection error end designation command is received. Further, in the switch disconnection error notification, all the decorative lamps 37 repeat red lighting and extinguishing (all red flashing), and are continuously executed until the switch disconnection error end designation command is received. Furthermore, in the switch unconnected error notification, a set of 5 seconds is set in which a voice saying "switch unconnected error" is output for 2 seconds and a warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds. is repeatedly executed until the switch disconnection error end designation command is received.

Note that the switch disconnection error notification may be performed in such a manner that the decoration lamp 37 is lit in full red.

In addition, in the switch disconnection error notification (switch disconnection error notification by sound) performed by the audio output device 32, the warning effect sound may be siren sounds B to F or a dedicated siren sound G may be used. Furthermore, the voice output time of the switch disconnection error notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time > warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and warning sound output time may be the same. (Voice output time=warning sound effect output time). Furthermore, in the switch disconnection error notification by sound, voice output may be performed only once at the start of notification (for example, after voice output, only a warning effect sound is output, etc.). Furthermore, in the switch disconnection error notification by sound, there may be no voice output, and only a warning sound effect may be output.

(8. Notification of plate full error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 105, the sub CPU 120a starts the full-dish error notification on condition that the full-dish full error start designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a terminates the notification of the full tank error on condition that the full tank error end designation command is received.

As shown in FIG. 105, in the full-dish error notification, an image 300H dedicated to error notification (in the example of FIG. 105, an image including the characters "Please remove the ball") is displayed on the screen (image display device 31). The notification in the form of being displayed in part (for example, the upper right corner) is continuously executed until the full tank error end designation command is received. Further, in the full-dish error notification, all of the decorative lamps 37 repeat red lighting and extinguishing (blinking all red), and are continuously executed until receiving the full-dish error end designation command. Furthermore, in the plate full error notification, the voice of "Please pull out the ball" is output for 2 seconds, and the mode of outputting the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) for 3 seconds is set for 5 seconds. The notification is repeatedly executed until the tray full error end designation command is received.

In addition, in the plate full error notification, the decoration lamp 37 may perform the notification in a mode of lighting in full red.

In addition, in the full-dish error notification (audio-based full-dish error notification) performed by the audio output device 32, the warning sound effect may be siren sounds B to F, or a dedicated siren sound H may be used. Furthermore, the voice output time for the full-dish error notification may be longer than the warning sound output time (voice output time > warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output may be the same time ( Voice output time=warning sound effect output time). Furthermore, in the full-dish error notification by sound, voice output may be performed only once at the start of notification (for example, after voice output, only warning sound effects are output). Furthermore, in the full-dish-up error notification by sound, there may be no voice output, and only a warning sound effect may be output.

Since the full-dish error is a particularly minor event among minor errors, the full-dish error notification only provides a predetermined display on the image display device 31 without sound notification. may be

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, examples of error notification images 300A to 300D for notifying serious errors such as RAM clear, power supply recovery, abnormal winning error, and magnetism detection error will be described.

In FIGS. 98 to 101, for the error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D for notifying a serious error, the entire area of the image display device 31 is darkened (the entire area other than the character image portion becomes a solid area), and other images are displayed. However, as described above, the error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D may be images in which other images are visible.

For example, as shown in FIG. 106(a), an image (images 300A to 300D dedicated to error notification) for notifying a serious error has an area having transparency in at least a part of the image dedicated to error notification. 106(a), the image 310 for error notification in FIG. 106(a) may be provided so that other images are difficult to be visually recognized, but other images can be visually recognized in the transmissive region.

Also, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the images (error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D) for notifying a serious error are the character images related to the error notification (in the example of FIG. 106(b), "abnormal winning is detected”) is displayed so as to occupy a large area in the effect display area 70, and the area other than the character image portion (area where other images can be seen) is small, making it difficult to see other images. However, it may be one in which another image can be visually recognized in an area other than the character image (the error notification dedicated image 320 in FIG. 106(b)).

That is, the error notification dedicated image (such as the error notification dedicated image 320) for notifying a serious error is displayed on a "part" of the image display device 31. It is desirable that the error notification dedicated images 300E to 300H be displayed on a "part" of the image display device 31 at the time of error notification of a minor error, which will be described later, in a wider area than the "part".

More specifically, when the error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D are displayed in a "part" of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70), the "partial" range means the effect display area 70, when the area occupied by the error notification image is defined as the "notification occupied area", the error notification image 300 for serious error notification is the error notification image for minor error notification. It is desirable that the area occupied by notification is larger than 300 (wide area).

(Regarding external information signals)
Next, the external information signal will be explained. The external information signal is output to the outside (hall computer, etc.) via the external terminal board 30 according to a command from the main control board 110 when an error occurs or when other conditions are satisfied (starting point winning, etc.). is a signal to be

(external terminal board)
107 is a plan view of the external terminal board 30. FIG. As shown in FIG. 107, the external terminal board 30 is mounted with output circuits OC[1] to OC[n], output terminal portions CN[1] to CN[n], and a connector CN11 (here, n=10), and each of the output circuits OC[1] to [n] includes a photocoupler PC and a resistive element R. Note that "n" is an arbitrary integer of 2 or more.

Note that the external terminal board 30 shown in FIG. 107 is provided with ten output terminal portions CN (output terminal portions CN1 to CN10).

(Structure of external terminal board)
Each output terminal section CN is composed of a pair of terminals. A pair of terminals of each output terminal portion CN are connected to an external device (not shown) via a pair of wiring (electrical wires). Some or all of the output terminals CN may be connected to the hall computer via the data display, or may be connected to the hall computer without the data display.

As external information signals output from the main control board 110 to the external terminal board 30, there are n types (10 types in this embodiment) of external information signals. The external information signals include, for example, a start signal (in other words, start information) indicating that the special symbol that has been displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, a jackpot signal (in other words, a jackpot) indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. information), a probability variable signal (in other words, probability variable information) indicating that the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability time-saving gaming state, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls paid out. Various signals (in other words, information) such as a prize ball signal (in other words, prize ball information) indicating that an error has been detected in the gaming machine 1 (in other words, error detection information), etc. included.

As shown in FIG. 107, the output terminal portions CN1 to CN10 are arranged in a line along the longitudinal direction of the external terminal board 30. As shown in FIG. In addition, each output terminal portion CN includes an output terminal portion CN1, an output terminal portion CN2, an output terminal portion CN3, an output terminal portion CN4, an output terminal portion CN5, an output terminal portion CN6, an output terminal portion CN6, and an output terminal portion CN1, an output terminal portion CN2, an output terminal portion CN3, an output terminal portion CN4, an output terminal portion CN5, an output terminal portion CN6, and an output terminal portion CN6. The output terminal portion CN7, the output terminal portion CN8, the output terminal portion CN9, and the output terminal portion CN10 are arranged in this order.

The external information signals (external information) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are "prize ball signal", "door/frame open signal", "external signal 1", "external signal 2", "external signal 3", " There are a total of 10 types of external signal 4, external signal 5, security signal, external signal 7, and external signal 8.

In the following description, an external information signal (external information) may be simply referred to as a "signal".

The output terminal units CN1 to CN10 correspond to each signal described above. Specifically, the output terminal portion CN1 is for the winning ball signal, the output terminal portion CN2 is for the door/frame opening signal, the output terminal portion CN3 is for the external signal 2, the output terminal portion CN5 is for the external signal 3, and the output terminal portion CN6 corresponds to the external signal 4, the output terminal portion CN7 corresponds to the external signal 5, the output terminal portion CN8 corresponds to the security signal, the output terminal portion CN9 corresponds to the external signal 7, and the output terminal portion CN10 corresponds to the external signal 8. .

Next, the details of each signal and the times during which the signals are ON and OFF will be described.

The prize ball signal is a signal (in other words, prize ball information) indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out. The winning ball signal is turned ON for 50 ms each time the count switch detects the passage of 10 game balls (see FIG. 108(a)).

The door/frame open signal is a signal used to output to the outside (hall computer, etc.) that the door is open (that the glass frame 50 is opened with respect to the outer frame 60). The door/frame open signal is turned ON while the door is open (see FIG. 108(b)).

The external signal 1 is a signal indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been stopped (stopped display) (in other words, a special symbol confirmation signal). That is, the external signal 1 is a signal indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped from fluctuating and the precondition for starting the next fluctuation (the precondition for receiving the fluctuation start command) has been met. . In other words, the external signal 1 is a start signal indicating the start of fluctuation, and the undetermined judgment information (holding number) increased by winning the first start port 14 or the second start port 15 is reduced by one. It can also be said that this is an update signal indicating that the number of undetermined information has decreased. The external signal 1 is turned ON for 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and turned OFF for 0.2 seconds (see FIG. 108(c)).

The external signal 2 is a signal indicating that the first starting hole detection switch 14a or the second starting hole detection switch 15a has detected passage of the game ball (in other words, a starting hole winning signal). That is, the external signal 2 indicates that the undetermined determination information triggered by the winning of the first start port 14 or the second start port 15 has been added by one (the number of undetermined information has increased). It can also be said that it is an update signal. The external signal 2 is turned ON for 0.2 seconds and turned OFF for 0.2 seconds when the first starting hole detection switch 14a or the second starting hole detection switch 15a detects the passage of the game ball (Fig. 108 ( d) see).

The external signal 3 is a signal (in other words, a jackpot signal) indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. The external signal 3 is turned ON from the time when the combination of symbols that will activate the conditional device is displayed, and the display time after the symbol is determined has elapsed until the operation of the conditional device is completed (Fig. 108 (e )reference).

The external signal 4 is a signal (in other words, an electrical support signal) indicating that the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. The external signal 4 is turned ON when the variable time shortening function of the special symbol display device is activated (during the time saving game state) (see FIG. 108(f)).

The external signal 5 is a signal used to detect the number of game balls that have passed through the out port 11 (in other words, an out ball detection signal). The external signal 5 adds the number of game balls passing by the out ball detection switch 11a, and is turned ON for 50 ms each time the addition result counts 10 (see FIG. 108(g)).

A security signal is a signal that indicates the occurrence of a serious event. More specifically, the security signal is a signal indicating that either an abnormal prize winning error or a magnetic detection error (board surface abnormality) has been detected, or that a RAM clearing operation has been performed. In other words, it can be said that the RAM clear, the abnormal prize winning error, and the magnetic detection error are error events for which the security signal is output. The security signal is turned ON for 0.2 seconds and turned OFF for 0.2 seconds from the time either an abnormal prize winning error or magnet detection error is detected, or the RAM is cleared and the game is ready to play ( See FIG. 108(h)).

The external signal 7 is a signal used to specify the number of game balls to be paid out (main prize ball signal). The external signal 7 is turned on for 0.2 seconds and turned off for 0.2 seconds each time 10 prize balls are counted by adding the number of prize balls to be paid out when each prize ball switch detects the passage of the game balls. (See FIG. 108(i)).

The external signal 8 is a signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (in other words, a general pattern gate signal). The external signal 8 is turned ON for 0.2 seconds and turned OFF for 0.2 seconds each time the game ball passes through the gate detection switch 13a (see FIG. 108(j)).

The arrangement of the output terminal units CN1 to CN10 is arbitrary. For example, the output terminal unit CN8 responsible for outputting a security signal for a serious error, and the output terminal unit CN4 responsible for outputting an external signal 4 indicating a start-up prize may be used as in the present embodiment. The output terminal portions may be arranged or may be adjacent to each other. Also, the arrangement of other output terminal portions is the same.

Here, in the gaming machine 1, there are cases where various events such as winning a prize at the starting port (the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15), occurrence of an error, etc. occur repeatedly. Also, when these events occur, the signal (external information signal) may be duplicated and output.

FIGS. 109 and 110 show overlapping patterns when signals (external information signals) are output in duplicate (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “signal overlap”). Note that FIGS. 109 and 110 show an example in which the security signal and the external signal 2 (starting gate winning signal) are output in duplicate. In this example, the overlap pattern of the security signal and the start winning signal is shown as an example, but the same applies when other signals overlap.

"Signal overlap" includes the case where two signals are output such that the ON periods or OFF periods of the two signals match.

For example, as shown in FIG. 109(a), the entire OFF period of one signal (for example, a security signal) and the entire ON period of another signal (for example, a start-up winning signal) overlap, and these signals may be output.

Also, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the entire ON period of one signal (for example, the security signal) and the entire ON period of another signal (for example, the start-up winning signal) overlap, and these signals may be output.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 109(c), the entire ON period of one signal (for example, the security signal) and the entire OFF period of the other signal (for example, the start-up winning signal) overlap, and these signals may be output.

In addition, "signal overlap" includes a case where at least part of the ON period or OFF period of one signal overlaps with at least part of the ON period or OFF period of another signal.

For example, as shown in FIG. 110(a), of the entire ON period of one signal (eg, security signal), part of the ON period and part of the OFF period of the other signal (eg, start-up winning signal) Overlap, part of the OFF period of one signal (for example, security signal) and part of the OFF period of another signal (for example, start-up winning signal) overlap, and these signals may be output. .

Also, as shown in FIG. 110(b), part of the ON period of one signal (security signal) overlaps part of the ON period of another signal (for example, the start winning signal), and the signal of 1 ( A part of the OFF period of the security signal) and a part of the OFF period of other signals (for example, the start-up winning signal) may be overlapped, and these signals may be output.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 110(c), part of the ON period of one signal (for example, the security signal) overlaps with part of the OFF period of another signal (for example, the start-up winning signal). A signal may be output.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 110(d), part of the OFF period of one signal (eg, security signal) overlaps with part of the ON period of another signal (eg, starting point winning signal), and these A signal may be output.

In this way, "signal overlap" means that at least a portion of the ON periods and OFF periods of two or more signals overlaps with at least a portion of the ON periods and OFF periods of other signals. means

(When error notification and other effects overlap)
Next, a mode in which the timing of error notification and the timing of performing another effect overlap will be described.

In the following, first, the case where the timing of the error notification for a minor error and the timing for performing another effect will be described. will be described.

In the following example, the icon appearance effect will be described as an example of the "other effect" that overlaps with the error notification timing.

In the following description, the "other effect" (for example, icon appearance effect) may be described as "effect X". Also, an image displayed in the effect X (for example, a pending icon) or an image displayed as a result of the effect X may be described as an "image GX". Further, in the case where there are a plurality of timings at which the image GX is displayed in the effect X, in the timing at which the image GX is displayed (for example, the appearance timing of the pending icon), the previous timing is described as "timing TX1", The timing after timing TX1 may be described as "timing TX2".

(In the case of error notification related to minor errors)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the occurrence of a minor error (in other words, an error in which the security signal is not output) and the timing at which the effect X is performed overlap, an error notification and effect related to the minor error are provided. Do both of X.

FIG. 111 shows, as an example, a case where the effect X is performed so that a plate full error occurs and overlaps with the plate full error notification.

As shown in FIG. 111, an error notification (a full plate error notification in FIG. 111) related to a minor error (a plate full tank error in FIG. 111) is started prior to the starting gate winning, and then there is a starting gate winning. When it is determined that the performance X is performed at the time of winning (timing TX1) with the start winning as a trigger, both the error notification and the performance X are performed. As described above, no security signal is output when a minor error occurs.

Specifically, since the error notification for a minor error is displayed in a part (such as a corner) of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70) (see FIG. 105 etc.), the effect display area 70 is large. part is visible. Therefore, even if an error notification related to a minor error is made, the player can visually recognize the effect X without hindering the visual recognition of the effect X. - 特許庁

The same applies to the case where the image GX displayed in the effect X is displayed at the timing TX2 (for example, after a predetermined time from the time of winning).

In this way, the effect X is executed when an error notification is given for a minor error. Also, if the effect X has a plurality of execution timings (when it can be executed at either one or both of the timing TX1 and the timing TX2), regardless of the timing at which the effect X is performed ( Effect X is performed regardless of timing TX1 or timing TX2.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the effect X is performed regardless of whether the execution timing of the effect X is earlier or later than the occurrence of a minor error.

(In case of error notification related to serious error)
Next, a case where the timing at which the error notification regarding the serious error is performed and the timing at which the effect X is performed overlap will be described.

In the following description, along with the execution timing of the error notification and effect X, the output timing of signals related to them will be described. Also, a signal related to the effect X (for example, a start winning signal) may be described as "another signal".

(if the security signal overlaps with another signal)
First, a mode in which a security signal and another signal are output in duplicate will be described. Note that "overlapping signals" is as described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, and may be any pattern in which two signals overlap.

As shown in FIG. 112, when a signal (security signal) related to a serious error and another signal related to the effect X (for example, an external signal 2 which is a start winning prize signal) are output at the same timing, an error occurs. While the notification is executed, the execution of the effect X is restricted.

Specifically, when a serious error (for example, a magnetic detection error) occurs, an image related to error notification (error notification dedicated image 300) is displayed in the entire area of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70) (Fig. 101). Also, when the security signal and other signals are output in duplicate, regardless of the execution timing of the effect X (for example, the timing of the appearance of the pending icon in the icon appearance effect) (timing TX1). or timing TX2), the image GX (for example, the pending icon) of the effect X cannot be visually recognized because of the image related to the error notification. That is, since the error notification dedicated image 300 is displayed on the entire area of the image display device 31, the image GX related to the effect X is not displayed, and as a result, the effect X is not performed.

In addition, when the images (error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D) announcing a serious error are displayed on a part of the image display device 31 (such as the error notification dedicated image 310 and the error notification dedicated image 320). ), it becomes difficult to visually recognize the effect X (image GX).

For example, as shown in FIG. 106(a), images (error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D) announcing a serious error have a transmittance of portions other than the character image different from that of the character image. As a result, it is difficult to grasp the image GX related to the effect X even if the image on the lower layer side can be seen through the portion other than the character image (such as the error notification image 310). That is, since the error notification dedicated image 300 is displayed so as to occupy most of the area of the image display device 31, it becomes difficult to visually recognize and comprehend the image GX related to the effect X, and as a result, the execution of the effect X is restricted. .

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 106(b), an image for notifying a serious error (error notification dedicated image) is displayed so as to occupy most of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70). If it is (like the image 320 dedicated to error notification), the proportion of the character portion of the image dedicated to error notification in the rendering display area 70 is large, and the visibility priority of other images is lowered, or the error It becomes difficult to grasp the image GX related to the effect X because the notification-dedicated image partially hides other images. That is, since the error notification image is displayed so as to occupy most of the area of the image display device 31, it becomes difficult to visually recognize and comprehend the image GX related to the effect X, and as a result, the execution of the effect X is restricted.

It should be noted that "the case where the error notification image is displayed in a 'part' of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70)" means that the error notification image is at least partly transparent. As a result, an image on the lower layer side (for example, the production pattern 38 or the pending icon) is difficult to see but can be seen (see FIG. 106(a)), and an error notification dedicated image is displayed in the production display area 70. It occupies the majority and is displayed, and as a result, the image on the lower layer side (for example, the production pattern 38 and the pending icon) is difficult to see but is visible (see FIG. 106(b)). be

Thus, in the gaming machine 1, when the security signal overlaps with the signal (other signal) related to the effect X, the execution of the effect X is restricted. Note that even if the security signal and other signals overlap (regardless of what pattern they overlap) and the execution of the effect X is restricted (not executed), the security Both signals and other signals are output.

Also, in the case where an error notification relating to a serious error is made, if the effect X has a plurality of execution timings (if it can be executed at either one or both of the timings TX1 and TX2). , the execution of the effect X is restricted regardless of the timing at which the effect X is performed (regardless of whether it is the timing TX1 or the timing TX2).

In the above description, as an example of a signal that is output so as to overlap with the security signal, the starting entrance winning signal (external signal 2) has been described as an example, but other signals and effects X are limited to the above description. Instead, it may be an external signal 1 (special figure confirmation signal) that is a prerequisite for the start of fluctuation, an external signal 3 that indicates that the jackpot is in progress, or a signal other than these. In addition, the effect X is not limited to the icon appearance effect, and may be a win-win flash effect, a look-ahead effect such as icon color change, or a pseudo-run, timer effect, or other effect performed during fluctuations. It can be a performance. The same applies to the following description (when signals do not overlap).

(if the security signal and other signals do not overlap)
Next, a mode in which the security signal and other signals are not output in duplicate (signal non-duplication) will be described. In the following description, the case where the security signal is output after the other signal will be described first, and then the case where the other signal is output after the security signal will be described.

FIG. 113 shows a case where another signal (for example, a start-up winning signal) is output, and a security signal relating to a serious error (for example, magnetic detection error) is output after completion of the output of the other signal.

As shown in FIG. 113, when another signal is output and the security signal is output after the output of the other signal is completed, if the execution timing of the effect X is earlier than the output timing of the security signal, the effect X is executed. may be done. For example, when the effect X is performed at the timing TX1, the effect X is performed when the timing TX1 is earlier than the output timing of the security signal. That is, the image GX relating to the effect X is displayed prior to the display of the error notification dedicated image 300 relating to the error notification, and at least part of the effect X (until the error notification dedicated image 300 is displayed) is executed. be.

When another signal is output and the security signal is output after the output of the other signal is completed, even if the execution timing of the effect X is earlier than the output timing of the security signal, the effect X is performed. sometimes not.

For example, as shown in FIG. 113, when the effect X is performed at the timing TX2, the execution of the effect X is restricted if the timing TX2 is later than the output timing of the security signal. That is, the display of the error notification dedicated image 300 related to error notification makes it difficult to visually recognize and comprehend the image GX related to the effect X, and as a result, the execution of the effect X is restricted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, when the timing TX1 in the effect X is later than the output timing of the security signal, the execution of the effect X is similarly restricted.

Next, a case where another signal is output after the security signal will be described. FIG. 115 shows a case where a security signal is output, and another signal (for example, a start-up winning signal) is output after the output of the security signal is completed.

As shown in FIG. 115, when the security signal is output and another signal is output after the output of the security signal is completed, regardless of whether the execution timing of the effect X is the timing TX1 or the timing TX2, the effect X execution is restricted. That is, the display of the error notification dedicated image 300 related to error notification makes it difficult to visually recognize and comprehend the image GX related to the effect X, and as a result, the execution of the effect X is restricted. Further, when the timing TX1 in the effect X is later than the output timing of the security signal, the execution of the effect X is similarly restricted.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the execution of another effect (effect X) may be restricted depending on the relationship between the output timing of the security signal and the output timing of another signal.

(Behavior when power is turned on and off)
Next, a case where the power supply is cut off before the performance X is performed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 116, after the execution of the effect X is determined, if the power is cut off before the timing TX1 or the timing TX2, the image GX of the effect X may not appear. Specifically, when it is decided to display the image GX (for example, a hold icon) at timing TX2 (for example, 2 seconds after the time of winning) when the effect X is determined (for example, when the start winning command is received). , when a power failure occurs until timing TX2, the image GX is not displayed even though it has been decided to display the image GX.

Here, with reference to FIG. 116, the case where the effect X is the icon appearance effect will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the appearance timing of the pending icon is determined at the time of winning, and the icon non-appearance flag is turned ON. Further, when the appearance of the pending icon is completed, the icon non-appearance flag is cleared. Note that the icon non-appearance flag is backed up in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c.

As shown in FIG. 116, when a power failure occurs while the icon non-appearance flag is ON, and then the power is restored (when the power is turned on and off), the effect control unit 120m performs a process of redetermining the icon appearance effect. (See Figure 59). Also, in the re-determining process, the appearance timing of the pending icon (either normal display, delayed display, or re-display) is re-determined. In other words, when the power is turned on and off, the appearance timing of the pending icon before the power failure is discarded, and the appearance timing of the pending icon is re-determined after the power is restored (when the screen is restored).

As shown in FIG. 116, when "normal display" is determined in the redetermining process, a hold icon appears and is displayed when the screen returns. Further, when "delayed display" is determined, a hold icon appears and is displayed two seconds after the screen is restored. In this way, the gaming machine 1 discards the execution timing (either normal display, delayed display, or re-display) regarding the appearance of the pending icon determined before the power is turned off, and the power is turned off. Determine the execution timing again after restoration.

Also, at the time of power restoration, although power restoration notification (error notification) is performed, the display of the error notification dedicated image 300 in the power restoration notification is performed when other commands (eg, customer waiting state designation command, fluctuation start command, etc.) are received After the termination, the notification by the decoration lamp 37 and the voice output device 32 continues for 30 seconds after the power is restored.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a pending icon that has not appeared when the power is turned off (if there is an icon non-appearing flag), at what timing the pending icon will appear when the screen returns. The icon appearance effect redetermining process for determining is performed. Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if a power outage occurs while there is a pending icon that has not yet appeared, after the power is restored (when the screen is restored, after a predetermined time has passed since the screen was restored, or when the screen is restored and After a predetermined period of time (both sides), a pending icon appears.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs in a state in which there is a pending icon that has not yet appeared (a state in which an icon not yet appearing flag exists), and the RAM is cleared after that, the icon not appearing flag is cleared. In other words, if a power failure occurs during the period from the winning of a prize to the start opening until the pending icon appears (while there is a pending icon that has not yet appeared), and the RAM is cleared after that, it will not appear. The pending icon does not appear.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and when there is a pending icon that has not yet appeared (between winning at the starting port and the appearance of the pending icon), a power failure occurs, and then the power The icon non-appearance flag may be cleared when restoration is performed. In other words, if there is a pending icon that has not yet appeared, even if the power is turned off and then the power is restored, or if the RAM is cleared, the icon non-appearance flag is set in either case. It is also possible to clear and prevent the appearance of the pending icon after the power is restored (if the power is cut off during the period from the winning of a prize to the starting port to the appearance of the pending icon, the pending icon will not appear without fail).

Although the embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention have been described above, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments.

For example, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shows an example in which the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, and the fourth jackpot game are shifted to a high probability game state over a predetermined number of times after the end of the game. The gaming machine of the invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may shift to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after all jackpot games are finished, and furthermore, the big win opening 16 opened in a specific round game of the jackpot game When the game ball passes through a specific area provided inside, it may be shifted to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game.

Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example in which one big winning hole is provided has been shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention may be provided with two or more big winning holes.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to the game state.

In addition, when the type of the special jackpot pattern is a normal pattern, it may be shifted to a low-probability non-time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, or when the type of the jackpot special pattern is a specific pattern, the jackpot. The game machine may be configured to shift to a high-probability time-saving game state a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, the gaming machine may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol may be given priority. may be executed by

Incidentally, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and can also be used for reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 gaming machine 110 main control board 110a main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c Main RAM
120 effect control board 120a sub CPU
120b Sub-ROM
120c sub-RAM
120m effect control unit 150 image control unit

Claims (1)

determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A production control means capable of executing production according to the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute an initial notification in response to power supply to the gaming machine, a predetermined effect indicating the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a specific effect different from the predetermined effect,
The predetermined effect is executed at a predetermined timing,
The specific effect may be executed at a specific timing after the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable effect in which a predetermined pattern is variably displayed ,
a timing determining means capable of determining the specific timing from among a plurality of timing candidates;
a case where the specific effect is performed at one of a first timing and a second timing after the first timing;
a case where the specific effect is performed at both the first timing and the second timing;
Even if the specific effect is performed, the special game may not be executed,
In a state in which the timing determining means has decided to execute the specific performance at the second timing but the specific performance has not yet been executed, the power supply to the game machine is interrupted, and then to the game machine. When the power supply is restarted, the specific effect can be executed at a third timing after the second timing , and the initial notification and the specific effect executed at the third timing are combined. redundantly executable
game machine.

Images